Micromotion 2700 Transmitter

Configuration and Use Manual
P/N 20000326, Rev. EA

July 2010
Micro Motion® Model 2700

Transmitter with
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration and Use Manual

©2010, Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved. The Micro Motion and Emerson logos are trademarks and service marks of Emerson
Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, MVD, ProLink, MVD Direct Connect, and PlantWeb are marks of one of the Emerson Process
Management family of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Contents
Chapter 1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Determining equipment versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Flowmeter documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Communication tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Out-of-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.7 Planning the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.8 Micro Motion customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Assigning function block channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Configuring the integrator function block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5 Configuring pressure compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.1 Pressure compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.2 Enabling pressure compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.3 Configuring a pressure source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6 Configuring temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.6.1 Enabling external temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.6.2 Configuring a temperature source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.7 Zeroing the flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.7.1 Preparing for the zeroing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.7.2 Zero procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.7.3 Restoring zero values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration . . . . . . 21
3.2.1 Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.2 Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.3 Meter validation and meter factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.5 Comparison and recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3 Performing a characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.1 Characterization parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.2 How to characterize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.4 Performing Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4.1 Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4.2 Running the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4.3 Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . 33
3.4.4 Setting up automatic or remote execution of the
Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5 Performing meter validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Configuration and Use Manual iii

Contents
3.6 Performing a density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.6.1 Preparing for density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.6.2 Density calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.7 Performing a temperature calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Chapter 4 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2 Configuration map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3 Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3.1 Configuring gas density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.4 Changing the measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.5 Creating special measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.6 Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.6.1 About the petroleum measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.6.2 Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.7 Configuring the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.7.1 About the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.7.2 Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.8 Changing the linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.9 Changing the output scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.10 Changing process alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.10.1 Alarm values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.10.2 Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.10.3 Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.11 Configuring status alarm severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.12 Changing the damping values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.12.1 Damping and volume measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.13 Changing slug flow limits and duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.14 Configuring cutoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.14.1 Cutoffs and volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.15 Changing the flow direction parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.16 Changing device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.17 Configuring sensor parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.18 Changing the display functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.18.1 Enabling and disabling display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.18.2 Changing the scroll rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.18.3 Changing the update period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.18.4 Changing the display password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.18.5 Changing the display variables and precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.18.6 Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.19 Configuring PlantWeb Alert timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.20 Configuring write-protect mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.21 Enabling LD Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Chapter 5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.2 Viewing process variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.2.1 Viewing API process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.2 Viewing concentration measurement process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3 Simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.1 Fieldbus simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.2 Sensor simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4 Responding to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
iv Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Contents
5.4.1 Viewing alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.4.2 Acknowledging alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.5 Using the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.5.1 Viewing the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.5.2 Controlling the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.2 Guide to troubleshooting topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.3 Transmitter does not operate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.4 Transmitter does not communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.4.1 National Instruments basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.5 Zero or calibration failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.6 AI block configuration error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.7 Output problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.7.1 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.2 Flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.3 Output scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.4 Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.5 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.6 Fieldbus network power conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.7 Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.8 Lost static data alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.9 Status alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.10 Diagnosing wiring problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.10.1 Checking the power-supply wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.10.2 Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.10.3 Checking the grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.10.4 Checking the communication wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.11 Checking slug flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.12 Restoring a working configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.13 Checking the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.13.1 Obtaining the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.13.2 Evaluating the test points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.13.3 Excessive drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.13.4 Erratic drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.13.5 Low pickoff voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.14 Checking the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.14.1 Exposing the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.14.2 Checking the core processor LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.14.3 Core processor resistance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.15 Checking sensor coils and RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.15.1 9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote
transmitter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.15.2 4-wire remote or integral installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Appendix A PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

A.1 PlantWeb Alerts explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
A.2 Setting PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
A.3 Using PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuration and Use Manual v

Contents
Appendix B Model 2700 Transducer Blocks Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

B.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B.1.1 Transducer block names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B.2 MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B.3 CALIBRATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
B.4 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
B.5 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
B.6 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
B.7 API transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
B.8 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Appendix C Model 2700 Resource Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

C.1 Resource block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
C.2 Resource block views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Appendix D Flowmeter Installation Types and Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

D.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
D.2 Installation diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
D.3 Component diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
D.4 Wiring and terminal diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Appendix E Connecting with the Field Communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

E.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E.2 Viewing the device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E.3 Connecting to a transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Appendix F Connecting with ProLink II or Pocket ProLink Software . . . . . . . . . 201

F.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
F.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
F.3 ProLink II configuration upload/download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
F.4 Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
F.4.1 Connecting to the service port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
F.5 ProLink II language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Appendix G Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

G.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
G.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
G.3 Using the optical switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
G.4 Using the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
G.4.1 Display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
G.4.2 Viewing process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
G.4.3 Using display menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
G.4.4 Display password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
G.4.5 Entering floating-point values with the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
G.5 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
vi Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Contents
Appendix H NE53 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

H.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
H.2 Software change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Configuration and Use Manual vii

viii Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Chapter 1
Before You Begin

Before You Begin
1.1 Overview
This chapter provides an orientation to the use of this manual, and includes a configuration worksheet.
This manual describes the procedures required to start, configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot
Micro Motion® Model 2700 transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus.
1.2 Safety
Startup
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each
safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
1.3 Determining equipment versions

Table 1-1 describes how to obtain version information for the transmitter, core processor,
Micro Motion ProLink® II, and Field Communicator. Unless otherwise stated, the instructions in this
manual assume transmitter firmware version 6.0 or later. In addition, many procedures assume your
transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor. Some procedures may function differently or
be unavailable if your transmitter is not connected to an enhanced core processor.
Table 1-1 Obtaining version information
Component With ProLink II With a fieldbus host With the display
Calibration
Transmitter firmware View > Installed Options > DEVICE INFO block > OFF-LINE MAINT > VER
Software Revision Revision Numbers >
2000 Series SW Rev
Core processor Not available DEVICE INFO block > OFF-LINE MAINT > VER
firmware Revision Numbers >
Core Processor SW Rev
ProLink II Help > About ProLink II Not applicable Not applicable
Communicator device Not applicable See Section E.2 Not applicable
description
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual 1

Before You Begin
1.4 Flowmeter documentation

Table 1-2 lists documentation sources for additional information.
Table 1-2 Flowmeter documentation resources
Topic Document
Installing the sensor Sensor installation manual
Installing the transmitter Micro Motion Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters:
Installation Manual
FOUNDATION fieldbus function block reference FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks
documentation (available via the Rosemount web site at
http://www.rosemount.com)
1.5 Communication tools

Most of the procedures described in this manual require the use of a communication tool. Three
communication tools are referred to in this manual:
• Fieldbus host – There are a number of available fieldbus hosts. In this manual, the Field
Communicator is assumed to be the host. Other hosts, such as DeltaV, provide functionality
that is very similar to that of the Communicator. Basic information on the Field Communicator
is provided in Appendix E. For more information, refer to the Field Communicator
documentation, which is available online (www.fieldcommunicator.com).
All fieldbus hosts require appropriate device description (DD) files in order to communicate
with and configure the transmitter. This manual assumes fieldbus hosts are using DDs for
device revision 6.x. DD files are available from the Products section of the Micro Motion web
site (www.micromotion.com).
• ProLink II – Basic information on ProLink II is provided in Appendix F. For more
information, refer to the ProLink II manual, which is available on the Micro Motion web site
(www.micromotion.com).
This manual assumes the use of ProLink II v2.91 or later.
• Display – Basic information on using the display is provided in Appendix G.
1.6 Out-of-service mode

Fieldbus function blocks may need to be placed in Out-of-service (O/S) mode before you modify their
parameters. The procedures in this manual assume that, if necessary, function blocks have been put in
O/S mode prior to starting the procedure, and that they will be placed back in service (i.e., Auto
mode) after the procedure is complete.
ProLink II automatically handles function block modes.
1.7 Planning the configuration

The ISA configuration worksheet at the end of this chapter provides a place to record information
about your flowmeter (transmitter and sensor) and your application. This information will affect your
configuration options as you work through this manual. Fill out the configuration worksheet and refer
to it during configuration. You may need to consult with transmitter installation or application process
personnel to obtain the required information.
2 Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Before You Begin
1.8 Micro Motion customer service

For customer service, phone the support center nearest you:
Before You Begin

• In the U.S.A., phone 800-522-MASS (800-522-6277) (toll-free)
• In Canada and Latin America, phone +1 303-527-5200
• In Asia:
- In Japan, phone 3 5769-6803
- In other locations, phone +65 6777-8211 (Singapore)
• In Europe:
- In the U.K., phone 0870 240 1978 (toll-free)
- In other locations, phone +31 (0) 318 495 555 (The Netherlands)
Customers outside the U.S.A. can also email Micro Motion customer service at
flow.support@emerson.com.
Startup
Calibration
Configuration

SHEET OF
FIELDBUS INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET
SPEC. NO. REV.
NO BY DATE REVISION
CONTRACT DATE
REQ. - P.O.
BY CHK'D APPR.
1 Meter Tag No.

2 Service
3 Location
4 Calibrated Flow Range, Units
5 Max Velocity, Units
6 Min. Flow Max. Flow Operating Flow
7 Min. Pressure Max. Pressure Operating Press.
FLUID
8 Min. Temp. Max. Temp. Operating Temp.
9 Spec. Gravity or Density (max)
10 Velocity (max)
11
12 Pipe Material
13 PIPE Pipe Size Upstream/Dnstream
14 DATA Schedule
15 Special Insulator
16 Process Connections
17 Approval
18 Wetted Parts
Mass Flow Accuracy @ Max
19
Flow Rate (% of rate)
20 Density Accuracy @ All Rates
21 Pressure Drop @ Max Flow
FLOW
22 Calibration Type
SENSOR
23 Cal. Rate Cal. Units
OPERATING 24 Custom Calibration Points
CONDITIONS 25 Dens. for Vol.to Mass Conv.
26 Spec. Unit Text Totalizer Text
27 Base Flow Unit Base Time Unit
28 Conversion Factor
29 Warning
30 Instrument Tag Number
31 Transmitter Style
32 Mass Unit Volume Unit
33 Dens. Unit Temp. Unit
34 Display
35 Safety
36 Conduit Adapters
37 Type Electronic microprocessor based
38 TRANS. Input Signal FOUNDATION fieldbus™ H1 ISA.50.02 IEC-61158
39 Baud Rate 31.25 Kbps
40 Physical Media Twisted pair wires, (H1) compliant
41 Power Supply 9–32 VDC, bus powered, 4 wires
42 Power Cons. on FF Bus 11.5 milliamps maximum
43 Input Voltage Model 2700: 18–100 VDC or 85–265 VAC
44 Device Class Link master ITK 4.60 minimum
45 Min. VCRs 20
46 Electrical Class ❑ FISCO ❑ Other
47 Device Function Block Fixed Type FOUNDATION fieldbus™ FF-891/FF-892 compliant
48 Resource Block (RB)
49 Transducer Block (TB)
50 Analog Input Block (AI) Exec. time 50 ms
51 Analog Output Block (AO) Exec. time 50 ms
FUNCTION
52 PID Block (PID) Exec. time 60 ms
BLOCKS
53 Integrator Block (INT) Exec. time 40 ms
54 Instantiable Function Blocks Model 2700: Not supported
❑ Measurement TB ❑ Calibration TB
55 Transducer Block Type ❑ Local Display TB ❑ Device Information TB
❑ Enhanced Density TB ❑ API TB
DIAGNOSTICS 56 ❑ Diagnostic TB
NOTES:
1 – The vendor must provide the Device Description according with the firmware revision of the field device. FOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOT FOR
2 – It is mandatory to provide the Capability Format File for each type of device. ISSUE.
3 – All devices must show FOUNDATION™ logo.
Chapter 2
Before You Begin

Startup
2.1 Overview
This chapter describes the procedures you should perform the first time you start up the flowmeter.
You do not need to use these procedures every time you cycle power to the flowmeter.
The procedures in this section will enable you to:
• Apply power to the flowmeter (Section 2.2)
• Check the analog input (AI) function blocks channels and change if required (Section 2.3)
Startup
• Check the integrator (INT) function block mode and configure if required (Section 2.4)
• Configure pressure compensation (optional) (Section 2.5)
• Configure temperature compensation (optional) (Section 2.6)
• Zero the flowmeter (optional) (Section 2.7)
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices E
and F.
2.2 Applying power

Before you apply power to the flowmeter, close and tighten all housing covers.
Calibration
WARNING
Operating the flowmeter without covers in place creates electrical hazards
that can cause death, injury, or property damage.
Make sure safety barrier partition and covers for the field-wiring, circuit board
compartments, electronics module, and housing are in place before applying
power to the transmitter.
Turn on the electrical power at the power supply. The flowmeter will automatically perform
diagnostic routines. If the transmitter has a display, the status LED will turn green and begin to flash
when the transmitter has finished its startup diagnostics.
Note: If this is the initial startup, or if power has been off long enough to allow components to reach
Configuration
ambient temperature, the flowmeter is ready to receive process fluid approximately one minute after
power-up. However, it may take up to ten minutes for the electronics in the flowmeter to reach thermal
equilibrium. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or
inaccuracy.

Startup
2.3 Assigning function block channels

The four AI function blocks and the AO function block may be assigned to one transducer block
channel each. The default channel configuration for each block is shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Default channel configuration
Block Default channel Units

AI 1 1 (mass flow) g/s
AI 2 2 (temperature) °C
AI 3 3 (density) g/cm3
AI 4 4 (volume flow) l/s
AO 6 (pressure) psi
If you need to change the channel configuration you must use a fieldbus host. Refer to Figure 2-1 and
Table 2-2.
Figure 2-1 Assigning function block channels – Fieldbus host
AI Channel or AO Channel
AI or AO
Transducer Scale: Units Index
Output Scale: Units Index
AI Channel – Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
AO Channel – Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
Transducer Scale: Units Index – Change the units (if necessary).
Output Scale: Units Index – If you change the units for Transducer Scale: Units Index, then change
the units here as well to match.

Startup
Table 2-2 Available transducer block channels
Before You Begin

Channel number Process variable Function block
1 Mass Flow Analog Input
2 Temperature Analog Input
3 Density Analog Input
4 Volume Flow Analog Input
5 Drive Gain Analog Input
6 Pressure Analog Output
7(1) API Corrected Density Analog Input
8(1) API Corrected Volume Flow Analog Input
(1)
9 API Average Corrected Density Analog Input
(1)
10 API Average Corrected Temp Analog Input
(1)
11 API CTL Analog Input
(2)
12 CM Reference Density Analog Input
Startup
(2)
13 CM Specific Gravity Analog Input
(2)
14 CM Standard Volume Flow Analog Input
15(2) CM Net Mass Flow Analog Input
16(2) CM Net Volume Flow Analog Input
(2)
17 CM Concentration Analog Input
(2)
18 CM Baume Analog Input
(3)
19 Gas Standard Volume Analog Input
20 External temperature Analog Output
(1) Channels 7 through 11 are not selectable unless the petroleum measurement application is enabled.
(2) Channels 12 through 18 are not selectable unless the concentration measurement application is enabled.
(3) Channel 19 is selectable only if gas standard volume measurement is enabled (see Section 4.3).
Calibration
2.4 Configuring the integrator function block
The behavior of the INT function block can be configured in two ways:
• Mode – The INT function block mode can be configured as:
- Standard, which provides standard fieldbus INT function block behavior
- Any of the values in Table 2-3, which cause the INT function block to pass through the
specified totalizer value from the MEASUREMENT transducer block
• Resetting – The INT function block can be configured for manual or automatic resetting when
a setpoint is reached.
You can only configure the INT function block using a fieldbus host (Figures 2-2 and 2-3).
Configuration

Startup
Figure 2-2 Configuring INT function block mode – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Integrator FB Configuration
Integrator FB Configuration – Set to the desired INT function block mode (see Table 2-3).
Table 2-3 INT function block modes
Reports the value of this parameter:

This mode: Transducer block Parameter
Standard None None — standard FOUNDATION fieldbus
INT block behavior
Internal mass total MEASUREMENT Mass Total: Value
Internal volume total MEASUREMENT Volume Total: Value
Internal mass inventory MEASUREMENT Mass Inventory: Value
Internal volume inventory MEASUREMENT Volume Inventory: Value
Internal gas volume total MEASUREMENT Gas Volume Total: Value
Internal gas volume inventory MEASUREMENT Gas Vol Inventory: Value
Internal API volume total API API Corr Volume Total: Value
Internal API volume inventory API API Corr Vol Inventory: Value
Internal CM standard volume total CONCENTRATION CM Std Volume Total: Value
MEASUREMENT
Internal CM standard volume CONCENTRATION CM Std Vol Inventory: Value
inventory MEASUREMENT
Internal CM net mass total CONCENTRATION CM Net Mass Total: Value
MEASUREMENT
Internal CM net mass inventory CONCENTRATION CM Net Mass Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
Internal CM net volume total CONCENTRATION CM Net Volume Total: Value
MEASUREMENT
Internal CM net volume inventory CONCENTRATION CM Net Vol Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT

Startup
Figure 2-3 Configuring manual or automatic resetting – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

INT
Integration Type
Total Setpoint
Integration Type – Set to manual or automatic resetting.

Total Setpoint – For automatic resetting, the value at which the totalizer will be reset.
2.5 Configuring pressure compensation

Due to process pressure change away from calibration pressure, there can be a change in sensor flow
and density sensitivity. This change is called pressure effect. Pressure compensation corrects for these
Startup
changes.
Not all sensors and applications require pressure compensation. Contact Micro Motion Customer
Service before you configure pressure compensation.
Configuring pressure compensation requires three steps:
1. Determining pressure compensation values (Section 2.5.1)
2. Enabling pressure compensation (Section 2.5.2)
3. Selecting a pressure source (Section 2.5.3)
2.5.1 Pressure compensation values

There are three values involved in pressure compensation:
Flow factor — The flow factor is the percent change in flow rate per psi. Consult the product
Calibration
•
data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the flow factor.
For example, if the flow factor in the product data sheet is –0.001% per psi, the pressure
compensation flow factor would be +0.001% per psi.
• Density factor — The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3 per psi. Consult the
product data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the
density factor. For example, if the density factor in the product data sheet is –0.00004 g/cm3
per psi, the pressure compensation flow factor would be +0.00004 g/cm3 per psi.
• Flow calibration pressure — The pressure at which the flowmeter was calibrated. Refer to the
calibration document shipped with your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 psi (1.4 bar).
2.5.2 Enabling pressure compensation

Configuration
You can enable pressure compensation with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-4) or ProLink II (Figure 2-5).
You will need the values of the three pressure compensation values from Section 2.5.1.

Startup
Figure 2-4 Pressure compensation – Fieldbus host
Pressure Comp
Flow Factor
CALIBRATION
Density Factor
Flowcal Pressure
Pressure Comp – Set to Enable.

Flow Factor – Set to the specified value (in percent per psi) from the sensor product data sheet
(reverse the sign).
Density Factor – Set to the specified value (in g/cm3 per psi) from the sensor product data sheet
(reverse the sign).
Flowcal Pressure – Set to the pressure at which the sensor was calibrated.
Figure 2-5 Pressure compensation – ProLink II
Enabling Configuring
View > ProLink >

Preferences Configuration
Select Enable External Pressure tab

Pressure Compensation
Enter values:
Apply • Flow factor in the Flow factor box
• Density factor in the Dens factor
box
• Flow calibration pressure in the Cal
pressure box
Apply
2.5.3 Configuring a pressure source

You will need to choose one of two sources for pressure data:
• Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for pressure data from an
external pressure source.
• Fixed pressure data — This option uses a known, constant pressure value.

Startup
Note: If you configure a fixed pressure value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling for
pressure, ensure that the external pressure measurement device is accurate and reliable.
Before You Begin

Note: You can configure the AO block for pressure compensation or temperature compensation, but
not both at the same time.
Using the Analog Output function block

You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a
pressure source, connect the AI block of the pressure measurement device to the AO block of the
transmitter (Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-6 External pressure source – Fieldbus host
AO Channel
Process Value Scale: Units Index

AI AO
Cascade
Startup
Input
Output
AO Channel – If changed from the default, reset

to Pressure (value = 6).
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the
pressure sensing device.
Using fixed pressure data

You can set up fixed pressure data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-7) or ProLink II (Figure 2-8). You
must enable external pressure compensation before you can set the fixed pressure value (see
Calibration
Section 2.5.2).
Figure 2-7 Fixed pressure data – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Pressure: Value
Pressure: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed pressure value.

Configuration

Startup
Figure 2-8 Fixed pressure data – ProLink II
Apply
2.6 Configuring temperature compensation

External temperature compensation can be used with the petroleum measurement application or the
concentration measurement application:
• If external temperature compensation is enabled, an external temperature value (or a fixed
temperature value), rather than the temperature value from the Coriolis sensor, is used in
petroleum measurement or concentration measurement calculations only. The temperature
value from the Coriolis sensor is used for all other calculations.
• If external temperature compensation is disabled, the temperature value from the Coriolis
sensor is used in all calculations.
Configuring temperature compensation requires two steps:
1. Enabling external temperature compensation (Section 2.6.1)
2. Configuring a temperature source (Section 2.6.2)
2.6.1 Enabling external temperature compensation

You can enable temperature compensation with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-9) or ProLink II
(Figure 2-10).
Figure 2-9 Temperature compensation – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Enable Temperature Compensation
Enable Temperature Compensation – Set to Enable.

Startup
Figure 2-10 Temperature compensation – ProLink II
Before You Begin

2.6.2 Configuring a temperature source
You will need to choose one of two sources for temperature data:
Startup
• Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for temperature data from an
external temperature source.
• Fixed temperature value — This option uses a known, constant temperature value.
Note: If you configure a fixed temperature value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling
for temperature, ensure that the external temperature measurement device is accurate and reliable.
Note: You can configure the AO block for pressure compensation or temperature compensation, but
not both at the same time.
Using the Analog Output function block

You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a
temperature source, connect the AI block of the temperature measurement device to the AO block of
the transmitter (Figure 2-11).
Calibration
Figure 2-11 External temperature source – Fieldbus host
AO Channel

AI AO
Cascade
Input
Output
AO Channel – Set to External Temperature

(value = 20).
Configuration
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the
temperature sensing device.

Startup
Using fixed temperature data

You can set up fixed temperature data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-12) or ProLink II (Figure 2-13).
You must enable external temperature compensation before you can set the fixed temperature value
(see Section 2.6.1).
Figure 2-12 Fixed temperature data – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
External Temperature: Value
External Temperature: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed temperature value.
Figure 2-13 Fixed temperature data – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Enter value in External
Temperature box
Temperature tab
Apply
2.7 Zeroing the flowmeter

Zeroing the flowmeter establishes the flowmeter’s point of reference when there is no flow. The meter
was zeroed at the factory, and should not require a field zero. However, you may wish to perform a
field zero to meet local requirements or to confirm the factory zero.
When you zero the flowmeter, you may need to adjust the zero time parameter. Zero time is the length
of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point. The default zero time is
20 seconds.
• A long zero time may produce a more accurate zero reference but is more likely to result in
zero failure. This is due to the increased possibility of noisy flow, which causes incorrect
calibration.
• A short zero time is less likely to result in a zero failure but may produce a less accurate zero
reference.
For most applications, the default zero time is appropriate.
Note: Do not zero the flowmeter if a high severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then zero the
flowmeter. You may zero the flowmeter if a low severity alarm is active. See Section 5.4 for
information about responding to alarms.

Startup
2.7.1 Preparing for the zeroing procedure

To prepare for the zeroing procedure:
Before You Begin

1. Apply power to the flowmeter. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for approximately 20 minutes.
2. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal
process operating temperature.
3. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.
4. Ensure that the sensor is completely filled with fluid and the flow through the sensor has
completely stopped.
CAUTION
If fluid is flowing through the sensor, the sensor zero calibration may be
inaccurate, resulting in inaccurate process measurement.
To improve the sensor zero calibration and measurement accuracy, ensure that
process flow through the sensor has completely stopped.
Startup
2.7.2 Zero procedure
You can perform the zero procedure with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-14), the display (Figure 2-15), or
ProLink II (Figure 2-16). If the zero procedure fails, see Section 6.5 for troubleshooting information.
Calibration
Configuration

Startup
Figure 2-14 Zeroing – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Zero Calibration
Zero Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.
Zero Calibration Adjust the zero time
Next
Set flow to zero
Calibration in progress
Next
Next
Next

Startup
Figure 2-15 Zeroing – Display
Before You Begin

Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
ZERO
Select
Startup
CAL ZERO
Select
ZERO/YES?
Select
………………….
CAL FAIL CAL PASS
Calibration
Troubleshoot
Select
ZERO
• See Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting.
Scroll
EXIT
Configuration

Startup
Figure 2-16 Zeroing – ProLink II
ProLink >
Calibration >
Zero Calibration
Modify zero time

if required
Perform Auto Zero
Calibration in Progress
LED turns red
Wait until Calibration in

Progress LED turns green
Calibration
Red Green
Failure LED
Done
Troubleshoot
• See Section 6.5 for troubleshooting.

• As long as you do not disconnect ProLink II from the transmitter, you
can restore the prior zero result.
2.7.3 Restoring zero values

ProLink II has the ability to restore a prior zero result as long as you have not exited the zeroing
screen.
In addition, if the transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor, you will be able to restore
the factory zero. Restoring the factory zero can be accomplished using a fieldbus host (Figure 2-17),
ProLink II (Figure 2-18), or the display (Figure 2-19).

Startup
Figure 2-17 Restoring factory zero – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

DIAGNOSTIC
Restore Factory Zero
Restore Factory Zero – Set this parameter to Restore.
Figure 2-18 Restoring factory zero – ProLink II
ProLink >
Calibration >
Startup
Zero Calibration
Restore Factory Zero
Calibration
Configuration

Startup
Figure 2-19 Restoring factory zero – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
ZERO
Select
CAL ZERO Scroll RESTORE ZERO Scroll EXIT
Select
Current zero display
Scroll
Factory zero display
Scroll
RESTORE ZERO
Scroll Select
RESTORE EXIT RESTORE ZERO/YES?
Yes No
Scroll
Scroll Select Select

Chapter 3
Before You Begin

Calibration
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes the following procedures:
• Characterization (Section 3.3)
• Smart Meter Verification (Section 3.4)
• Meter validation and adjusting meter factors (Section 3.5)
• Density calibration (Section 3.6)
Startup
• Temperature calibration (Section 3.7)
and F.
3.2 Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration

There are four procedures:
• Characterization—adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor
with which it is paired
• Smart Meter Verification—establishing confidence in the sensor’s performance by analyzing
secondary variables that are highly correlated with flow and density calibration factors
Calibration
• Meter validation—confirming performance by comparing the sensor’s measurements to a
primary standard
• Calibration—establishing the relationship between a process variable (flow, density, or
temperature) and the signal produced by the sensor
Meter validation, characterization, and calibration are available on all Model 2700 transmitters. Smart
Meter Verification is available only if the Smart Meter Verification option was ordered with the
transmitter.
These four procedures are discussed and compared in Sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.5. Before performing
any of these procedures, review these sections to ensure that you will be performing the appropriate
procedure for your purposes.
3.2.1 Characterization
Configuration
Characterizing the flowmeter adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor
it is paired with. Characterization parameters (sometimes called “calibration factors”) describe the
sensor’s sensitivity to flow, density, and temperature.

Calibration
If the transmitter and the sensor were ordered together as a Coriolis flowmeter, then the flowmeter has
already been characterized. Under some circumstances (typically when pairing a sensor and
transmitter together for the first time), you may need to re-enter characterization data. If you are
unsure about whether you should characterize your flowmeter, contact Micro Motion Customer
Service.
3.2.2 Smart Meter Verification

Smart Meter Verification evaluates the structural integrity of the sensor tubes by comparing current
tube stiffness to the stiffness measured at the factory. Stiffness is defined as the load per unit
deflection, or force divided by displacement. Because a change in structural integrity changes the
sensor’s response to mass and density, this value can be used as an indicator of measurement
performance. Changes in tube stiffness are typically caused by erosion, corrosion, or tube damage.
Smart Meter Verification does not affect measurement in any way. Micro Motion recommends
performing Smart Meter Verification at regular intervals.
3.2.3 Meter validation and meter factors

Meter validation compares a measurement value reported by the transmitter with an external
measurement standard. Meter validation requires one data point.
Note: For meter validation to be useful, the external measurement standard must be more accurate
than the sensor. See the sensor’s product data sheet for its accuracy specification.
If the transmitter’s mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the
external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. A meter
factor is the value by which the transmitter multiplies the process variable value. The default meter
factors are 1.0, resulting in no difference between the data retrieved from the sensor and the data
reported externally.
Meter factors are typically used for proving the flowmeter against a weights and measures standard.
You may need to calculate and adjust meter factors periodically to comply with regulations.
3.2.4 Calibration
The flowmeter measures process variables based on fixed points of reference. Calibration adjusts
those points of reference. Three types of calibration can be performed:
• Zero (see Section 2.7)
• Density calibration
• Temperature calibration
Density and temperature calibration require two data points (low and high) and an external
measurement for each. Calibration produces a change in the offset and/or the slope of the line that
represents the relationship between process density and the reported density value, or the relationship
between process temperature and the reported temperature value.
Note: For density or temperature calibration to be useful, the external measurements must be
accurate.
Flowmeters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.
Calibrate the flowmeter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact Micro
Motion before calibrating your flowmeter.

Calibration
Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to
prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.
Before You Begin

3.2.5 Comparison and recommendations
When choosing among Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration, consider the
following factors:
• Process and measurement interruption
- Smart Meter Verification provides an option that allows process measurement to continue
during the test.
- Meter validation for density does not interrupt the process. However, meter validation for
mass flow or volume flow requires process down-time for the length of the test.
- Calibration requires process down-time. In addition, density and temperature calibration
require replacing the process fluid with low-density and high density fluids, or
low-temperature and high-temperature fluids. Zero calibration requires stopping flow
through the sensor.
Startup
• External measurement requirements
- Smart Meter Verification does not require external measurements.
- Zero calibration does not require external measurements.
- Density calibration, temperature calibration, and meter validation require external
measurements. For good results, the external measurement must be highly accurate.
• Measurement adjustment
- Smart Meter Verification is an indicator of sensor condition, but does not change
flowmeter internal measurement in any way.
- Meter validation does not change flowmeter internal measurement in any way. If you
decide to adjust a meter factor as a result of a meter validation procedure, only the reported
measurement is changed—the base measurement is not changed. You can always reverse
the change by returning the meter factor to its previous value.
Calibration
- Calibration changes the transmitter’s interpretation of process data, and accordingly
changes the base measurement. If you perform a zero calibration, you can return to the
factory zero (or, if using ProLink II, the previous zero). However, if you perform a density
calibration or a temperature calibration, you cannot return to the previous calibration
factors unless you have manually recorded them.
Micro Motion recommends obtaining the Smart Meter Verification transmitter option and performing
Smart Meter Verification on a regular basis.
3.3 Performing a characterization

Characterizing a flowmeter involves entering parameters that are printed on the sensor tag.
Configuration
3.3.1 Characterization parameters

The characterization parameters that must be entered depend on the sensor type: “T-Series” or
“Other,” as listed in Table 3-1. The “Other” category includes all Micro Motion sensors except
T-Series.

Calibration
The characterization parameters are provided on the sensor tag. The format of the sensor tag varies
depending on your sensor’s date of purchase. See Figures 3-1 and 3-2 for illustrations of newer and
older sensor tags.
Table 3-1 Sensor calibration parameters
Sensor type
Characterization data Fieldbus parameter T-Series Other
K1 K1 ✓ ✓(1)
K2 K2 ✓ ✓(1)
FD FD ✓ ✓(1)
D1 D1 ✓ ✓(1)
D2 D2 ✓ ✓(1)
Temp coeff (DT)(2) Temperature Coefficient ✓ ✓(1)
Flow cal Flow Calibration Factor ✓(3)
FCF Flow Calibration Factor ✓
FT Temperature Coefficient for Flow ✓
FTG T-Series Flow TG Coeff ✓
FFQ T-Series Flow FQ Coeff ✓
DTG T-Series Density TG Coeff ✓
DFQ1 T-Series Density FQ Coeff 1 ✓
DFQ2 T-Series Density FQ Coeff 2 ✓
(1) See the section entitled “Density calibration factors.”
(2) On some sensor tags, shown as TC.
(3) See the section entitled “Flow calibration values.”
Figure 3-1 Sample calibration tags – All sensors except T-Series

Newer tag Older tag
19.0005.13
12502142824.44
0.0010 12502.000 19.0005.13
0.9980 14282.000 12500142864.44
4.44000 310

Calibration
Figure 3-2 Sample calibration tags – T-Series sensors
Before You Begin

Newer tag Older tag
Density calibration factors

If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:
• For D1, enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the
Startup
line-condition density of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air.
• For D2, enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the
line-condition density of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water.
If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:
• For K1, enter the first 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1,
this value is shown as 12500.
• For K2, enter the second 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in
Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 14286.
If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact Micro Motion customer service.
If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last 3 digits of the density calibration
factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 4.44.
Calibration
Flow calibration values
Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4-character
FT value. Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these are entered as a single
10-character string that includes two decimal points. In ProLink II, this value is called the Flowcal
parameter; in the Communicator, it is called the FCF for T-Series sensors, and Flowcal for other
sensors.
To obtain the required value:
• For older T-Series sensors, concatenate the FCF value and the FT value from the sensor tag, as
shown below.
Flow FCF X.XXXX FT X.XX
Configuration
• For newer T-Series sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the FCF
value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No
concatenation is required.
• For all other sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the Flow Cal
value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No
concatenation is required.

Calibration
3.3.2 How to characterize

To characterize the flowmeter, enter data from the sensor’s calibration tag into the transmitter
memory. You can characterize the transmitter with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-3) or ProLink II software
(Figure 3-4).
Note: You must configure the sensor type before you enter the characterization parameters.
Figure 3-3 Characterization – Fieldbus host
DEVICE
INFORMATION
Sensor Type Code
Sensor Type Code – Set to Curved Tube or Straight Tube to match sensor type.
CALIBRATION
* – Set each of the fieldbus parameters shown in Table 3-1 to the value of the associated sensor data
printed on the sensor’s calibration tag.
Figure 3-4 Characterization – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Device
• Sensor type
Straight Curved
Sensor type?
tube tube
Flow Flow
Density Density
T Series Config

Calibration
3.4 Performing Smart Meter Verification

Note: To use Smart Meter Verification, the transmitter must be paired with an enhanced core
Before You Begin

processor, and the Smart Meter Verification option must be purchased for the transmitter.
3.4.1 Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test

The Smart Meter Verification procedure can be performed on any process fluid. It is not necessary to
match factory conditions.
During the test, process conditions must be stable. To maximize stability:
• Maintain a constant temperature and pressure.
• Avoid changes to fluid composition (e.g., two-phase flow, settling, etc.).
• Maintain a constant flow. For higher test certainty, stop flow.
If stability varies outside test limits, the Smart Meter Verification procedure will be aborted. Verify
the stability of the process and retry the test.
Transmitter configuration
Startup
Smart Meter Verification is not affected by any parameters configured for flow, density, or
temperature. It is not necessary to change the transmitter configuration.
Control loops and process measurement

If the transmitter outputs will be set to Last Measured Value or Fault during the test, the outputs will
be fixed for two minutes. Disable all control loops for the duration of the test, and ensure that any data
reported during this period is handled appropriately.
3.4.2 Running the Smart Meter Verification test

To run a Smart Meter Verification test, refer to the procedures shown in Figures 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, and 3-8.
Calibration
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-5 Smart Meter Verification – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTIC
Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification
Start On-Line Smart – Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.
Meter Verification
Step 1
Set output state (optional)
Step 2
Manual abort (optional)
Start/abort procedure
Step 3
Check current algorithm state
Step 4
Running? Yes (>0)
Read percent complete
No (=0)
Step 8 Step 5
Check abort code Check algorithm abort state
Able to Step 6
No (<16) Yes (=16)
complete? Check inlet stiffness
No (>0) Within limits?
Yes (=0)
Step 7
Check outlet stiffness
No (>0) Within limits?
Yes (=0)
CAUTION PASS

Calibration
Table 3-2 Fieldbus host interface for Smart Meter Verification
Before You Begin

Step number Step description Parameters
1 Set output state Block: Diagnostic
Index: 55
Value:
• 0: Last measured value (default)
• 1: Fault
2 Start/abort procedure Block: Diagnostic
Index: 54 (Start/Stop Meter Verification)
• 0: Abort
• 1: Start
• 6: Start in Continue Measurement mode(1)
3 Check current algorithm state Block: Diagnostic
Index: 57
4 Read percent complete Block: Diagnostic
Index: 60 (Progress)
5 Check algorithm abort state Block: Diagnostic
Index: 59
Startup
6 Check inlet stiffness Block: Diagnostic
Index: 61
• 0: Within uncertainty limit
• 1: Outside uncertainty limit
7 Check outlet stiffness Block: Diagnostic
Index: 62
• 0: Within uncertainty limit
• 1: Outside uncertainty limit
8 Read abort code Block: Diagnostic
Index: 58
Codes: See Table 3-3
(1) Setting Index 85 (Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification) to 1 is equivalent to setting Index 54 to 6.
Calibration
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-6 Smart Meter Verification – ProLink II
Tools >
Meter Verification >
Run Meter Verification
Verify configuration
View Previous Results
parameters
Next
Enter descriptive data

(optional)
Next
Configuration Changed
No Yes
or Zero Changed?
View details (optional)
Select output behavior
Start Meter Verification
---------------------
Fail Test result Pass
Rerun
Yes No
test? Abort Next Back
Test result chart
Next
Report
Finish

Calibration
Figure 3-7 Smart Meter Verification – Display
Before You Begin

for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY Scroll RESULTS READ Scroll SCHEDULE VERFY Scroll EXIT
Select Select Select

Scroll Select
Startup
Calibration
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-8 Smart Meter Verification – Display
RUN VERFY
Select
OUTPUTS Scroll EXIT
Select
CONTINUE MEASR Scroll FAULT Scroll LAST VALUE Scroll EXIT
ARE YOU SURE/YES?
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x% Select SENSOR ABORT/YES?
Scroll Select
Pass Test result Abort
Fail
PASS VERFY CAUTION VERFY ABORTED VERFY
Scroll Scroll Scroll
RESULTS VIEW/YES? Abort Type
Scroll
Scroll Select
To Runcount RERUN/YES?
(see Results Read)
Yes No
Correct condition Scroll
To Enter Meter Verfy

Select

Calibration
3.4.3 Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results
Before You Begin

Pass/Fail/Abort
When the Smart Meter Verification test is completed, the result will be reported as Pass, Fail/Caution
(depending on the tool you are using), or Abort:
• Pass – The test result is within the specification uncertainty limit. In other words, the stiffness
of the left and right pickoffs match the factory values plus or minus the specification
uncertainty limit. If transmitter zero and configuration match factory values, the sensor will
meet factory specifications for flow and density measurement. It is expected that meters will
pass Smart Meter Verification every time the test is run.
• Fail/Caution – The test result is not within the specification uncertainty limit. Micro Motion
recommends that you immediately repeat the Smart Meter Verification test. If you previously
set outputs to Continue Measurement, change the setting to Last Measured Value or Fault.
- If the meter passes the second test, the first Fail/Caution result can be ignored.
- If the meter fails the second test, the flow tubes may be damaged. Use your process
knowledge to determine the possibilities for damage and the appropriate actions for each.
Startup
These actions might include removing the meter from service and physically inspecting
the tubes. At minimum, you should perform a flow validation and a density calibration.
• Abort – A problem occurred with the Smart Meter Verification test (e.g., process instability).
Abort codes are listed in Table 3-3, and suggested actions are provided for each code.
Table 3-3 Smart Meter Verification abort codes
Abort code Description Suggested action

1 User-initiated abort None required. Wait for 15 seconds before starting
another test.
3 Frequency drift Ensure that temperature, flow, and density are stable,
and rerun the test.
5 High drive gain Ensure that flow is stable, minimize entrained gas, and
rerun the test.
Calibration
8 Unstable flow Review the suggestions for stable flow in Section 3.4.1
and rerun the test.
13 No factory reference data for Smart Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
Meter Verification test performed on air abort code.
14 No factory reference data for Smart Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
Meter Verification test performed on abort code.
water
15 No configuration data for Smart Meter Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
Verification abort code.
Other General abort Repeat the test. If the test aborts again, contact
Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort
code.
Configuration

Calibration
Detailed test data with ProLink II

For each test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:
• Powered-on seconds at the time of the test
• Test result
• Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If
the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.
• Abort code, if applicable
ProLink II stores additional descriptive information for each test in a database on the local PC,
including:
• Timestamp from the PC clock
• Current flowmeter identification data
• Current flow and density configuration parameters
• Current zero values
• Current process values for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, density, temperature, and external
pressure
• (Optional) User-entered customer and test descriptions
If you run a Smart Meter Verification test from ProLink II, ProLink II first checks for new test results
on the transmitter and synchronizes the local database if required. During this step, ProLink II
displays the following message:
Synchronizing x out of y
Please wait
Note: If you request an action while synchronization is in process, ProLink II displays a message
asking whether or not you want to complete synchronization. If you choose No, the ProLink II
database may not include the latest test results from the transmitter.
Test results are available at the end of each test, in the following forms:
• A test result chart (see Figure 3-9).
• A test report that includes the descriptive information for the current test, the test result chart,
and background information about Smart Meter Verification. You can export this report to an
HTML file or print it to the default printer.
Note: To view the chart and the report for previous tests without running a test, click View Previous
Test Results and Print Report from the first Smart Meter Verification panel. See Figure 3-9. Test
reports are available only for tests initiated from ProLink II.

Calibration
Figure 3-9 Test result chart
Before You Begin

Initiated from ProLink II
Initiated from the display or other tool
Startup
Calibration
The test result chart shows the results for all tests in the ProLink II database, plotted against the
specification uncertainty limit. The inlet stiffness and the outlet stiffness are plotted separately. This
helps to distinguish between local and uniform changes to the sensor tubes.
This chart supports trend analysis, which can be helpful in detecting meter problems before they
become severe.
Configuration

Calibration
Note the following:

• The test result chart may not show all test results, and test counters may not be continuous.
ProLink II stores information about all tests initiated from ProLink II and all tests available on
the transmitter when the test database is synchronized. However, the transmitter stores only the
twenty most recent test results. To ensure a complete result set, always use ProLink II to
initiate the tests, or synchronize the ProLink II database before overwriting occurs.
• The chart uses different symbols to differentiate between tests initiated from ProLink II and
tests initiated using a different tool. A test report is available only for tests that were initiated
from ProLink II.
• You can double-click the chart to manipulate the presentation in a variety of ways (change
titles, change fonts, colors, borders and gridlines, etc.), and to export the data to additional
formats (including “to printer”).
• You can export this chart to a CSV file for use in external applications.
Detailed test data with the display

For each Smart Meter Verification test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:
• Powered-on seconds at the time of the test
• Test result
• Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If
the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.
• Abort code, if applicable
To view this data, see Figures 3-6 and 3-10.

Calibration
Figure 3-10 Smart Meter Verification test data – Display
Before You Begin

RESULTS READ
Select
RUNCOUNT x
Select Scroll
Pass Result type Abort
Fail
Startup
PASS CAUTION Abort Type
xx L STF% xx L STF%
Select Select
xx R STF% xx R STF%
Select Select
Calibration
xx SEC
RESULTS MORE?
Select Scroll
To Runcount x-1 To Run Verfy

Configuration

Calibration
3.4.4 Setting up automatic or remote execution of the Smart Meter Verification test
There are two ways to execute a Smart Meter Verification test automatically:
• Set up a one-time automatic execution
• Set up a recurring execution
To set up a one-time automatic execution, set up a recurring execution, view the number of hours until
the next scheduled test, or delete a schedule:
- With ProLink II, choose Tools > Meter Verification > Schedule Meter Verification.
- With the display, see Figures 3-6 and 3-11.
- With a fieldbus host, Smart Meter Verification scheduling resides in the Diagnostic
transducer block. See Figure 3-12.
Note the following:
• If you are setting up a one-time automatic execution, specify the start time as a number of
hours from the present time. For example, if the present time is 2:00 and you specify 3.5 hours,
the test will be initiated at 5:30.
• If you are setting up a recurring execution, specify the number of hours to elapse between
executions. The first test will be initiated when the specified number of hours has elapsed, and
testing will be repeated at the same interval until the schedule is deleted. For example, if the
present time is 2:00 and you specify 2 hours, the first test will be initiated at 4:00, the next at
6:00, and so on.
• If you delete the schedule, both the one-time execution and the recurring execution settings are
deleted.

Calibration
Figure 3-11 Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Display
Before You Begin

SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
No Schedule set? Yes
SCHED IS OFF TURN OFF SCHED/YES?
Scroll
Scroll Select
Schedule deleted
HOURS LEFT
Startup
Scroll Select
xx HOURS
Select
SET NEXT Scroll SET RECUR Scroll EXIT
Select Select
Scroll Select
Calibration
xx HOURS xx HOURS
SAVE/YES? SAVE/YES?
No Yes No Yes
Scroll Select Scroll Select

Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-12 Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTIC Time Until First Run

Time Between Each Run
Time Until Next Run
Time Until First Run – Number of hours to wait before starting Smart Meter Verification
Time Between – Number of hours to wait between each Smart Meter Verification test, after the
Each Run first test is completed
Time Until Next Run – Number of hours until the next Smart Meter Verification test begins
3.5 Performing meter validation

To perform meter validation, measure a sample of the process fluid and compare the measurement
with the flowmeter’s reported value.
Use the following formula to calculate a meter factor:
ExternalStandard
NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor × -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ActualTransmitterMeasurement
Valid values for meter factors range from 0.8 to 1.2. If the calculated meter factor exceeds these
limits, contact Micro Motion customer service.
Example The flowmeter is installed and proved for the first time. The flowmeter
mass measurement is 250.27 lb; the reference device measurement is
250 lb. A mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:
250
MassFlowMeterFactor = 1 × ------------------ = 0.9989
250.27
The first mass flow meter factor is 0.9989.
One year later, the flowmeter is proved again. The flowmeter mass
measurement is 250.07 lb; the reference device measurement is
250.25 lb. A new mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:
250.25
MassFlowMeterFactor = 0.9989 × ------------------ = 0.9996
250.07
The new mass flow meter factor is 0.9996.
You can adjust meter factors with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-13), ProLink II (Figure 3-14), or the
display (Figure 3-15).

Calibration
Figure 3-13 Meter factors – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

Mass Meter Factor
MEASUREMENT
Volume Meter Factor
Density Meter Factor
Mass Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for mass flow.
Volume Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for volume flow.
Density Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for density.
Figure 3-14 Meter factors – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set values:
• Mass Factor
• Dens Factor
• Vol Factor
Calibration
Apply
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-15 Meter factors – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT FACTOR MASS
Select Scroll
Scroll
FACTOR VOL
CONFG
Scroll
Select
Select
Scroll FACTOR DENS
Scroll Scroll
MTR F
EXIT
3.6 Performing a density calibration

Density calibration includes the following calibration points:
• All sensors:
- D1 calibration (low-density)
- D2 calibration (high-density)
• T-Series sensors only:
- D3 calibration (optional)
- D4 calibration (optional)
For T-Series sensors, the optional D3 and D4 calibrations could improve the accuracy of the density
measurement. If you choose to perform the D3 and D4 calibrations:
• Do not perform the D1 or D2 calibrations.
• Perform the D3 calibration if you have one calibrated fluid.
• Perform both the D3 and D4 calibrations if you have two calibrated fluids (other than air
and water).
The calibrations that you choose must be performed without interruption, in the order listed here.
Note: Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. If you are using
ProLink II, you can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration
fails, restore the known values.

Calibration
3.6.1 Preparing for density calibration

Before beginning density calibration, review the requirements in this section.
Before You Begin

Sensor requirements
During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow
through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually
accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with
the appropriate fluid.
Density calibration fluids

D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low density) fluid and a D2 (high density) fluid. You may
use air and water. If you are calibrating a T-Series sensor, the D1 fluid must be air and the D2 fluid
must be water.
CAUTION
Startup
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the
D2 calibration must be performed on water.
For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
• Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm3
• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water.
The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water.
For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
• Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm3
• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3
fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the density of the D3 fluid.
Calibration
• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water.
The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water
3.6.2 Density calibration procedures

To perform a D1 and D2 density calibration:
• With a fieldbus host, see Figure 3-16.
• With ProLink II, see Figure 3-17.
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-16 D1 and D2 calibration – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Low Density Calibration
High Density Calibration
Low Density Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the D1 procedure below.
High Density Calibration Method parameter that initiates the D2 procedure below.
D1 calibration D2 calibration
Close shutoff valve downstream

Low Density Calibration High Density Calibration
from sensor
Next Next
Fill sensor completely Fill sensor completely

with low-density fluid with high-density fluid
Next Next
• If calibration fails, see
Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information. Enter the density of Enter the density of
the calibration fluid the calibration fluid
Next Next
Calibration in progress Calibration in progress
Finish

Calibration
Figure 3-17 D1 and D2 calibration – ProLink II
Before You Begin

Close shutoff valve

Fill sensor with D1 fluid Fill sensor with D2 fluid
downstream from sensor
ProLink Menu > ProLink Menu >

Calibration > Calibration >
Density cal – Point 1 Density cal – Point 2
Enter density of D1 fluid Enter density of D2 fluid
Do Cal Do Cal
Startup
Calibration in Progress Calibration in Progress
light turns red light turns red

light turns green light turns green
Close Close
Done
Calibration
Configuration

Calibration
Figure 3-18 D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration (T-Series only) – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
D3 Density Calibration
D4 Density Calibration
D3 Density Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the D3 procedure below.

D4 Density Calibration Method parameter that initiates the D4 procedure below.
Close shutoff valve downstream

D3 Density Calibration D4 Density Calibration
from sensor
Next Next

with D3 fluid with D4 fluid
• If calibration fails, see Next Next

Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information.
Enter the density of Enter the density of
the calibration fluid the calibration fluid
Next Next
Calibration in progress Calibration in progress
Finish Finish

Calibration
Figure 3-19 D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration – ProLink II
Before You Begin

Close shutoff valve

Fill sensor with D3 fluid Fill sensor with D4 fluid
downstream from sensor

Density cal – Point 3 Density cal – Point 4
Enter density of D3 fluid Enter density of D4 fluid
Do Cal Do Cal
Startup

Close
Close
Done Done
Calibration
Section 6.5 for troubleshooting
information.
Configuration

Calibration
3.7 Performing a temperature calibration

Temperature calibration is a two-point procedure: temperature offset calibration and temperature
slope calibration. The entire procedure must be completed without interruption.
You can calibrate for temperature with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 3-20 Temperature calibration – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Temp Low Calibration
Temp High Calibration
Temp Low Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the low-temperature procedure below.
Temp High Calibration Method parameter that initiates the high-temperature procedure below.
Temp Low Calibration Temp High Calibration
Next Next

with low-temperature with high-temperature
fluid fluid
Allow sensor to Allow sensor to

achieve equilibrium achieve equilibrium
Enter the temperature Enter the temperature

of the calibration fluid of the calibration fluid
Next Next
Calibration in progress Calibration in progress • If calibration fails,

see Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information.
Finish

Calibration
Figure 3-21 Temperature calibration – ProLink II
Before You Begin

Temperature Offset calibration Temperature Slope calibration
Fill sensor with low- Fill sensor with high-

temperature fluid temperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves Wait until sensor achieves

thermal equilibrium thermal equilibrium

Temp offset cal Temp slope cal
Enter temperature of low- Enter temperature of high-

temperature fluid temperature fluid
Startup
Do Cal Do Cal


Close Close
Done
Calibration
Section 6.5 for troubleshooting
information.
Configuration

Chapter 4
Before You Begin

Configuration
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to change the operating settings of the transmitter.
and F.
Startup
4.2 Configuration map
Use the map in Table 4-1 to guide you through a complete or partial configuration of the transmitter.
Table 4-1 Configuration map
Method
Topic Fieldbus host ProLink II Display Section
Gas standard volume ✓ ✓ 4.3
Measurement units ✓ ✓ ✓ 4.4
Special measurement units ✓ ✓ 4.5
Petroleum measurement application ✓ ✓ 4.6
Concentration measurement application ✓ ✓ 4.7
Calibration
Linearization ✓ 4.8
Output scale ✓ 4.9
Process alarms ✓ 4.10
Alarm severity ✓ ✓ 4.11
Damping ✓ ✓ 4.12
Slug flow ✓ ✓ 4.13
Cutoffs ✓ ✓ 4.14
Flow direction ✓ ✓ 4.15
Device settings ✓ ✓ 4.16
Sensor parameters ✓ ✓ 4.17
Display functionality ✓ ✓ ✓ 4.18
Configuration
PlantWeb Alert timeout ✓ ✓ 4.19

Write-protect mode ✓ ✓ ✓ 4.20
LD Optimization ✓ ✓ 4.21

Configuration
4.3 Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas

Two types of volume flow measurement are available:
• Liquid volume (the default)
• Gas standard volume
Only one type of volume flow measurement can be performed at a time (i.e., if liquid volume flow
measurement is enabled, gas standard volume flow measurement is disabled, and vice versa).
Different sets of volume flow measurement units are available, depending on which type of volume
flow measurement is enabled. If you want to use a gas volume flow unit, additional configuration is
required.
Note: If you will use the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement
application, liquid volume flow measurement is required.
Gas standard volume flow can be configured with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-1) or ProLink II
(Figure 4-2). In either case, you must:
• Enable gas standard volume flow
• Specify the standard density (density at reference conditions) of your gas
• Select the measurement unit to use (see Section 4.4)
• Set the low flow cutoff value (see Section 4.14)
Note: The display will allow you to select a volume measurement unit from the set available for the
configured volume flow type, but it will not allow you to configure gas standard volume flow.
Figure 4-1 GSV – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Enable Gas Standard Volume
Enable Gas Standard Volume – Set to Enable to set volume flow to use gas standard volume. Set to
Disable to use liquid volume flow.

Configuration
Figure 4-2 GSV – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set Vol Flow Type to

Std Gas Volume
Apply
Startup
4.3.1 Configuring gas density
You have two choices for entering the standard density of the gas you are going to measure (i.e., the
density of the gas at reference conditions):
• If you know the standard density, you can enter that value into the transmitter. For optimal
standard volume measurement accuracy, be sure the standard density you enter is correct and
fluid composition is stable. You can enter the gas density with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-3) or
ProLink II (Figure 4-4).
• If you do not know the standard density of the gas, and you are using ProLink II, you can use
the Gas Wizard (Figure 4-5). The Gas Wizard can calculate the standard density of the gas that
you are measuring.
Calibration
Figure 4-3 Gas density – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Gas Density
Gas Density – Set to the standard density of the gas you are going to measure.
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-4 Gas density – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set Std Gas Density

to the appropriate
value
Apply
Figure 4-5 Gas Wizard – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Enter new values for

temperature and
Flow tab pressure
Gas Wizard Reference Change Reference

No Conditions
values correct?
Gas listed in Select Enter Other Yes

No
Choose Gas list? Gas Property
Next
Select gas description

Yes method: Finish
• Molecular weight
• Specific gravity
Select Choose Gas compared to air
• Density
Select your gas from Provide required

the list information
Next

Configuration
4.4 Changing the measurement units

The transmitter stores measurement units in three different places: the MEASUREMENT transducer
Before You Begin

block, the AI blocks, and the AO block. If you configure the measurement units in the AI or AO
blocks, the MEASUREMENT block will be automatically updated. However, if you configure the
units only in the MEASUREMENT block, the AI and AO blocks will not be updated. This results in
the following behaviors:
• Because ProLink II and the display store and retrieve the units stored in the MEASUREMENT
block, configuring units using ProLink II or the display will not update the AI and AO blocks.
Affected AI and AO blocks will get a configuration error if units are changed in the
MEASUREMENT block but not in the AI or AO block.
• Configuring the units in the MEASUREMENT block with a fieldbus host will produce the
same results as if the units had been changed using ProLink II or the display (i.e., the related
AI or AO blocks will get a configuration error unless their units are also changed).
• Configuring the units in an AI or AO block using a fieldbus host will cause the units in
ProLink II and on the display to be updated correctly.
Measurement units can be changed with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-6), ProLink II (Figure 4-7), and the
Startup
display (Figure 4-8). Refer to Tables 4-2 through 4-7 for complete lists of the units you can set for
each process variable.
Note: When the transmitter is configured for liquid volume flow, only liquid volume units are
available (Table 4-3). When the transmitter is configured for gas volume flow, only gas volume units
are available (Table 4-4).
Note: Changing the measurement units for a process variable automatically changes the associated
totalizer units as well. For example, setting the mass flow units to g/s will automatically set the mass
totalizer unit to grams.
Figure 4-6 Changing measurement units – Fieldbus host
Calibration
AI
Transducer Scale: Units Index
Transducer Scale: Units Index – Set to the desired measurement units.
AO
Configuration
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Set to the desired measurement units.

Configuration
Figure 4-7 Changing measurement units – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Density tab Flow tab Temperature tab
Select unit from Dens Select unit from Vol Select unit from Mass Select unit from
Units list Flow Units(1) list Flow Units list Temp Units list
Apply Apply Apply
(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as Std gas vol flow units.
Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause
the AI block to get a configuration error.

Configuration
Figure 4-8 Changing measurement units – Display
Before You Begin

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
MASS
Select Scroll
Scroll
VOL(1)
CONFG
Scroll
Select Select
Startup
DENS
UNITS
Scroll
TEMP
Scroll
PRESS
(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as GSV.
Calibration
Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause the
AI block to get a configuration error.
Table 4-2 Mass flow measurement units
Mass flow unit

Fieldbus host ProLink II Display Unit description
g/s g/s G/S Grams per second
g/min g/min G/MIN Grams per minute
g/h g/hr G/H Grams per hour
kg/s kg/s KG/S Kilograms per second
Configuration
kg/min kg/min KG/MIN Kilograms per minute

kg/h kg/hr KG/H Kilograms per hour
kg/d kg/day KG/D Kilograms per day
t/min mTon/min T/MIN Metric tons per minute
t/h mTon/hr T/H Metric tons per hour

Configuration
Table 4-2 Mass flow measurement units (continued)
Mass flow unit

t/d mTon/day T/D Metric tons per day
lb/s lbs/s LB/S Pounds per second
lb/min lbs/min LB/MIN Pounds per minute
lb/h lbs/hr LB/H Pounds per hour
lb/d lbs/day LB/D Pounds per day
STon/min sTon/min ST/MIN Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute
STon/h sTon/hr ST/H Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour
STon/d sTon/day ST/D Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
LTon/h lTon/hr LT/H Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
LTon/d lTon/day LT/D Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
Table 4-3 Volume flow measurement units – Liquid
Volume flow unit

CFS ft3/sec CUFT/S Cubic feet per second
CFM ft3/min CUF/MN Cubic feet per minute
CFH ft3/hr CUFT/H Cubic feet per hour
ft3/d ft3/day CUFT/D Cubic feet per day
3
m /s m3/sec M3/S Cubic meters per second
3
m /min m3/min M3/MIN Cubic meters per minute
3
m /h m3/hr M3/H Cubic meters per hour
3
m /d m3/day M3/D Cubic meters per day
gal/s US gal/sec USGPS U.S. gallons per second
GPM US gal/min USGPM U.S. gallons per minute
gal/h US gal/hr USGPH U.S. gallons per hour
gal/d US gal/d USGPD U.S. gallons per day
Mgal/d mil US gal/day MILG/D Million U.S. gallons per day
L/s l/sec L/S Liters per second
L/min l/min L/MIN Liters per minute
L/h l/hr L/H Liters per hour
ML/d mil l/day MILL/D Million liters per day
ImpGal/s Imp gal/sec UKGPS Imperial gallons per second
ImpGal/min Imp gal/min UKGPM Imperial gallons per minute
ImpGal/h Imp gal/hr UKGPH Imperial gallons per hour
ImpGal/d Imp gal/day UKGPD Imperial gallons per day
bbl/s barrels/sec BBL/S Barrels per second(1)
bbl/min barrels/min BBL/MN Barrels per minute(1)
bbl/h barrels/hr BBL/H Barrels per hour(1)

Configuration
Table 4-3 Volume flow measurement units – Liquid (continued)
Before You Begin

Volume flow unit
bbl/d barrels/day BBL/D Barrels per day(1)
— Beer barrels/sec BBBL/S Beer barrels per second(2)
— Beer barrels/min BBBL/MN Beer barrels per minute(2)
— Beer barrels/hr BBBL/H Beer barrels per hour(2)
— Beer barrels/day BBBL/D Beer barrels per day(2)
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
Table 4-4 Volume flow measurement units – Gas
Volume flow unit
Startup
3
Nm /s Nm3/sec NM3/S Normal cubic meters per second
3
Nm /m Nm3/min NM3/MN Normal cubic meters per minute
3
Nm /h Nm3/hr NM3/H Normal cubic meters per hour
3
Nm /d Nm3/day NM3/D Normal cubic meters per day
NL/s NLPS NLPS Normal liter per second
NL/m NLPM NLPM Normal liter per minute
NL/h NLPH NLPH Normal liter per hour
NL/d NLPD NLPD Normal liter per day
SCFM SCFM SCFM Standard cubic feet per minute
SCFH SCFH SCFH Standard cubic feet per hour
Calibration
3
Sm /s Sm3/S SM3/S Standard cubic meters per second
3
Sm /m Sm3/min SM3/MN Standard cubic meters per minute
3
Sm /h Sm3/hr SM3/H Standard cubic meters per hour
3
Sm /d Sm3/day SM3/D Standard cubic meters per day
SL/s SLPS SLPS Standard liter per second
SL/m SLPM SLPM Standard liter per minute
SL/h SLPH SLPH Standard liter per hour
SL/d SLPD SLPD Standard liter per day
Table 4-5 Density measurement units
Density unit
Configuration

3
g/cm g/cm3 G/CM3 Grams per cubic centimeter
g/L g/l G/L Grams per liter
g/ml g/ml G/ML Grams per milliliter
kg/L kg/l KG/L Kilograms per liter

Configuration
Table 4-5 Density measurement units (continued)
Density unit
kg/m3 kg/m3 KG/M3 Kilograms per cubic meter
lb/gal lbs/Usgal LB/GAL Pounds per U.S. gallon
lb/ft3 lbs/ft3 LB/CUF Pounds per cubic foot
3
lb/in lbs/in3 LB/CUI Pounds per cubic inch
3
STon/yd sT/yd3 ST/CUY Short ton per cubic yard
degAPI degAPI D API Degrees API
SGU SGU SGU Specific gravity unit (not temperature
corrected)
Table 4-6 Temperature measurement units
Temperature unit
°C °C °C Degrees Celsius
°F °F °F Degrees Fahrenheit
°R °R °R Degrees Rankine
K °K °K Kelvin
Although pressure units are listed in Table 4-7, the transmitter does not measure pressure. These units
are for configuring external pressure compensation. Refer to Section 2.5.
Table 4-7 Pressure measurement units
Pressure unit
ftH20 (68°F) Ft Water @ 68°F FTH2O Feet water @ 68 °F
inH2O (4°C) In Water @ 4°C INW4C Inches water @ 4 °C
inH20 (68°F) In Water @ 68°F INH2O Inches water @ 68 °F
mmH2O (4°C) mm Water @ 4°C mmW4C Millimeters water @ 4 °C
mmH20 (68°F) mm Water @ 68°F mmH2O Millimeters water @ 68 °F
inHg (0°C) In Mercury @ 0°C INHG Inches mercury @ 0 °C
mmHg (0°C) mm Mercury @ 0°C mmHG Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
psi PSI PSI Pounds per square inch
bar bar BAR Bar
mbar millibar mBAR Millibar
g/cm2 g/cm2 G/SCM Grams per square centimeter
kg/cm2 kg/cm2 KG/SCM Kilograms per square centimeter
Pa pascals PA Pascals
MPa megapascals MPA Megapascals

Configuration
Table 4-7 Pressure measurement units (continued)
Before You Begin

Pressure unit
kPa Kilopascals KPA Kilopascals
torr Torr @ 0C TORR Torr @ 0 °C
atm atms ATM Atmospheres
4.5 Creating special measurement units

If you need to use a non-standard unit of measure, you can create special measurement units. There
are two methods available for creating special units:
• Using the special unit features of the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This method is
described in this section.
• Using the Transducer Scale, Output Scale, and Linearization parameters of an AI function
block. This method is not described in this section. Refer to Sections 4.8 and 4.9, and the
Startup
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks manual, available from the Rosemount web site
(www.rosemount.com), for information about creating special units using this method.
The MEASUREMENT transducer block supports one special unit for mass flow, one special
measurement unit for liquid volume flow, and one special unit for gas volume flow. Special
measurement units consist of:
• Base unit — A combination of:
- Base mass or base volume unit — A standard measurement unit that the transmitter
already recognizes (e.g., kg, m3)
- Base time unit — A unit of time that the transmitter already recognizes
(e.g., seconds, days)
• Conversion factor — The number by which the base unit will be divided to convert to the
special unit
Calibration
• Special unit — A non-standard volume-flow or mass-flow unit of measure that you want to be
reported by the transmitter.
The terms above are related by the following formulae:
x [ Base units ] = y [ Special units ]
x [ Base units ]
Conversion factor = ------------------------------------------
y [ Special units ]
To create a special unit, you must:

1. Identify the simplest base volume or mass and base time units for your special unit. For
example, to create the special volume flow unit pints per minute, the simplest base units are
gallons per minute:
Configuration
a. Base volume unit: gallon

b. Base time unit: minute

Configuration
2. Calculate the conversion factor:
1 gallon per minute

--------------------------------------------------- = 0.125
8 pints per minute
3. Name the new special mass-flow or volume-flow measurement unit and its corresponding
totalizer measurement unit:
a. Special volume-flow measurement unit name: pint/min
b. Volume totalizer measurement unit name: pints
Note: Special measurement unit names can be up to 8 characters long, but only the first 5 characters
appear on the display.
Special units can be created with a fieldbus host (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11) or with ProLink II
(Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-9 Special units for mass flow – Fieldbus host
Mass flow special units base
Mass flow special units time
MEASUREMENT Mass flow special units conv
Mass flow special units str
Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
Mass flow special units base – Set to a mass unit.

Mass flow special units time – Set to a unit of time.
Mass flow special units conv – Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal mass units. When this parameter is
not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special mass units.
Mass flow special units str – Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str – Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

Configuration
Figure 4-10 Special units for liquid volume flow – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

Vol flow special units base
Vol flow special units time
MEASUREMENT Vol flow special units conv
Vol flow special units str
Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
Vol flow special units base – Set to a liquid volume unit.

Vol flow special units time – Set to a unit of time.
Vol flow special units conv – Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal liquid volume units. When this
parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special liquid
volume units.
Startup
Vol flow special units str – Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str – Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
Figure 4-11 Special units for gas volume flow – Fieldbus host
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time
MEASUREMENT Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor
Calibration
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text
Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base – Set to a gas volume unit.
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time – Set to a unit of time.
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor – Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal gas volume units. When this
parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special gas
volume units.
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text – Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text – Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-12 Special mass and volume units – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration (1) These labels are slightly different when volume flow
is configured for gas standard volume: Base Gas Vol
Unit, Base Gas Vol Time, Gas Vol Flow Conv Fact,
Gas Vol Flow Text, and Gas Vol Total Text.
Special Units tab
Special mass unit Special volume unit
Set the base, time, and Set the base, time, and
conversion factor: conversion factor:
• Base Mass Unit • Base Vol Unit(1)
• Base Mass Time • Base Vol Time(1)
• Mass Flow Conv Fact • Vol Flow Conv Fact(1)
Set the unit names: Set the unit names:

• Mass Flow Text • Vol Flow Text(1)
• Mass Total Text • Vol Total Text(1)
Apply
4.6 Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature)

The API parameters determine the values that will be used in API-related calculations. The API
parameters are available only if the petroleum measurement application is enabled on your
transmitter.
Note: The petroleum measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you plan
to use API process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow measurement is specified. See
Section 4.3.
4.6.1 About the petroleum measurement application

Some applications that measure liquid volume flow or liquid density are particularly sensitive to
temperature factors, and must comply with American Petroleum Institute (API) standards for
measurement. The petroleum measurement application enables Correction of Temperature on volume
of Liquids, or CTL.

Configuration
Terms and definitions

The following terms and definitions are relevant to the petroleum measurement application:
Before You Begin

• API – American Petroleum Institute
• CTL – Correction of Temperature on volume of Liquids. The CTL value is used to calculate
the VCF value
• TEC – Thermal Expansion Coefficient
• VCF – Volume Correction Factor. The correction factor to be applied to volume process
variables. VCF can be calculated after CTL is derived
CTL derivation methods

There are two derivation methods for CTL:
• Method 1 is based on observed density and observed temperature.
• Method 2 is based on a user-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient, in
some cases) and observed temperature.
Startup
API reference tables
Reference tables are organized by reference temperature, CTL derivation method, liquid type, and
density unit. The table selected here controls all the remaining options.
• Reference temperature:
- If you specify a 5x, 6x, 23x, or 24x table, the default reference temperature is 60 °F, and
cannot be changed.
- If you specify a 53x or 54x table, the default reference temperature is 15 °C. However, you
can change the reference temperature, as recommended in some locations (for example, to
14.0 or 14.5 °C).
• CTL derivation method:
- If you specify an odd-numbered table (5, 23, or 53), CTL will be derived using method 1
described above.
Calibration
- If you specify an even-numbered table (6, 24, or 54), CTL will be derived using method 2
described above.
• The letters A, B, C, or D that are used to terminate table names define the type of liquid that the
table is designed for:
- A tables are used with generalized crude and JP4 applications.
- B tables are used with generalized products.
- C tables are used with liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion
coefficient.
- D tables are used with lubricating oils.
• Different tables use different density units:
- Degrees API
Configuration
- Relative density (SG)

- Base density (kg/m3)
Table 4-8 summarizes these options.

Configuration
Table 4-8 API reference temperature tables
CTL Density unit and range

derivation
Table method Base temperature Degrees API Base density Relative density
5A Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable 0 to +100
5B Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable 0 to +85
5D Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable –10 to +40
23A Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable 0.6110 to 1.0760
23B Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable 0.6535 to 1.0760
23D Method 1 60 °F, non-configurable 0.8520 to 1.1640
3
53A Method 1 15 °C, configurable 610 to 1075 kg/m
53B Method 1 15 °C, configurable 653 to 1075 kg/m3
53D Method 1 15 °C, configurable 825 to 1164 kg/m3
Reference temperature Supports

6C Method 2 60 °F, non-configurable 60 °F Degrees API
24C Method 2 60 °F, non-configurable 60 °F Relative density
54C Method 2 15 °C, configurable 15 °C Base density in kg/m3
4.6.2 Configuration procedure

The API configuration parameters are listed and defined in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9 API parameters
Variable Description
Table type Specifies the table that will be used for reference temperature and reference density unit. Select
the table that matches your requirements. See API reference tables.
User defined TEC(1) Thermal expansion coefficient. Enter the value to be used in CTL calculation.
(2)
Temperature units Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference temperature in the reference table.
Density units Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference density in the reference table.
Reference Read-only unless Table Type is set to 53x or 54x. If configurable:
temperature • Specify the reference temperature to be used in CTL calculation.
• Enter reference temperature in °C.
(1) Configurable if Table Type is set to 6C, 24C, or 54C.
(2) In most cases, the temperature unit used by the API reference table should also be the temperature unit configured for the transmitter
to use in general processing. To configure the temperature unit, see Section 4.4.

Configuration
Setting the table type

You can set the API table type with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-13) or ProLink II (Figure 4-14).
Before You Begin

Figure 4-13 API table type – Fieldbus host
API
API Table Type
API Table Type – Set to the desired table type.
Figure 4-14 API table type – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Select table type from

the API Table Type
list
Calibration
Apply
Setting the reference temperature

For the temperature value to be used in CTL calculation, you can use the temperature data from the
sensor, or you can configure external temperature compensation to use either a static temperature
value or temperature data from an external temperature device.
• To use temperature data from the sensor, no action is required.
• To configure external temperature compensation, see Section 2.6.
You can set the reference temperature using a fieldbus host (Figure 4-15) or ProLink II (Figure 4-16).
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-15 API reference temperature – Fieldbus host
API
API Reference Temp
API Reference Temp – Set to the desired temperature (in the currently-configured temperature units).
Figure 4-16 API reference temperature – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Enter the reference

temperature in the User
defined reference
temperature list
Apply
Setting the thermal expansion coefficient

If the CTL derivation method for the API table type is method 2, you need to set the thermal
expansion coefficient (TEC). You can set a user-defined TEC with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-17) or
Figure 4-17 TEC – Fieldbus host
API
User Defined TEC
User Defined TEC – Set to the desired thermal expansion coefficient.

Configuration
Figure 4-18 TEC – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Enter a coefficient in the

User defined TEC box
Apply
Startup
4.7 Configuring the concentration measurement application
Micro Motion sensors provide direct measurements of density, but not of concentration. The
concentration measurement application calculates concentration measurement process variables, such
as concentration or density at reference temperature, from density process data, appropriately
corrected for temperature.
Note: For a detailed description of the concentration measurement application, see the manual
entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.
Note: The concentration measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you
plan to use concentration measurement process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow
measurement is specified. See Section 4.3.
Calibration
4.7.1 About the concentration measurement application
The concentration measurement calculation requires a concentration measurement curve, which
specifies the relationship between temperature, concentration, and density for the process fluid being
measured. Micro Motion supplies a set of six standard concentration measurement curves (see
Table 4-10). If none of these curves is appropriate for your process fluid, you can configure a custom
curve or purchase a custom curve from Micro Motion.
The derived variable, specified during configuration, controls the type of concentration measurement
that will be produced. Each derived variable allows the calculation of a subset of concentration
measurement process variables (see Table 4-11). The available concentration measurement process
variables can be used in process control, just as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, and other process
variables are used. For example, an event can be defined on a concentration measurement process
variable.
Configuration
• For all standard curves, the derived variable is Mass Conc (Dens).
• For custom curves, the derived variable may be any of the variables listed in Table 4-11.
The transmitter can hold up to six curves at any given time, but only one curve can be active (used for
measurement) at a time. All curves that are in transmitter memory must use the same derived variable.

Configuration
Table 4-10 Standard curves and associated measurement units
Name Description Density unit Temperature unit

3
Deg Balling Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in g/cm °F
solution, based on °Balling. For example, if a wort
is 10 °Balling and the extract in solution is 100%
sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
Deg Brix Curve represents a hydrometer scale for sucrose g/cm3 °C
solutions that indicates the percent by mass of
sucrose in solution at a given temperature. For
example, 40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of
water results in a 40 °Brix solution.
Deg Plato Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in g/cm3 °F
solution, based on °Plato. For example, if a wort is
10 °Plato and the extract in solution is 100%
sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
HFCS 42 Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 42 g/cm3 °C
(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates
the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
Table 4-11 Derived variables and available process variables
Available process variables

Density at Standard Specific Concentration Net Net
Derived variable – ProLink II label reference volume gravity mass volume
and definition temperature flow rate flow rate flow rate
Density @ Ref ✓ ✓
Density at reference temperature
Mass/unit volume, corrected to a given
reference temperature
SG ✓ ✓ ✓
Specific gravity
The ratio of the density of a process fluid at
a given temperature to the density of water
at a given temperature. The two given
temperature conditions do not need to be
the same.
Mass Conc (Dens) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Mass concentration derived from reference
density
The percent mass of solute or of material
in suspension in the total solution, derived
from reference density
Mass Conc (SG) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Mass concentration derived from specific
gravity
The percent mass of solute or of material
from specific gravity

Configuration
Table 4-11 Derived variables and available process variables (continued)
Before You Begin

Available process variables
Density at Standard Specific Concentration Net Net
Derived variable – ProLink II label reference volume gravity mass volume
and definition temperature flow rate flow rate flow rate
Volume Conc (Dens) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Volume concentration derived from
reference density
The percent volume of solute or of material
from reference density
Volume Conc (SG) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Volume concentration derived from specific
gravity
The percent volume of solute or of material
from specific gravity
Conc (Dens) ✓ ✓ ✓
Concentration derived from reference
Startup
density
The mass, volume, weight, or number of
moles of solute or of material in
suspension in proportion to the total
solution, derived from reference density
Conc (SG) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Concentration derived from specific gravity
The mass, volume, weight, or number of
moles of solute or of material in
suspension in proportion to the total
solution, derived from specific gravity
Calibration
Configuration

Configuration
4.7.2 Configuration procedure

Complete configuration instructions for the concentration measurement application are provided in
the manual entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.
Note: The concentration measurement manual uses ProLink II as the standard configuration tool for
the concentration measurement application. Because the fieldbus parameters are very similar to the
ProLink II labels, you can follow the instructions for ProLink II and adapt them to your host. All of
the parameters related to the concentration measurement application can be found in the
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block (see Appendix B).
The typical configuration procedure simply sets up the concentration measurement application to use
a standard curve. The following steps are required:
1. Set the transmitter’s density measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as listed in
Table 4-10).
2. Set the transmitter’s temperature measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as
listed in Table 4-10).
3. Set the derived variable to Mass Conc (Dens).
4. Specify the active curve.
4.8 Changing the linearization

Linearization translates a process variable into different measurement units and onto a new scale.
Output scaling and linearization relate to each other in the following way:
• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Direct, the AI block reports process
variables directly from the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The transmitter is shipped
with all AI blocks set to Direct linearization by default.
• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect, the value from the
MEASUREMENT transducer block is converted according to the Output Scale parameters
(see Section 4.9).
In addition, the AI block output is converted according to the Transducer Scale parameters, but
with a 1/x transformation, i.e., if the upper bound of the Transducer Scale is set to 50%, the
output will be doubled.
Indirect linearization can be used along with Output Scale and Transducer Scale to create
special measurement units. Refer Section 4.9 and to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks manual,
available from the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com), for information about creating
special units using this method.
• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect square root, the AI block
reports the square root of the scaled output. In general, indirect square root linearization is not
useful for Coriolis meters.
You can change the linearization setting only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-19).

Configuration
Figure 4-19 Linearization – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

AI
Linearization Type
Linearization Type – Set to the desired linearization value.
4.9 Changing the output scale

The AI function blocks can be configured to scale their output. The output scale is established by
defining a process variable value at 0% of scale and at 100% of scale. The output of the AI block will
be translated to a value between these two limits.
Startup
Note: Although it is possible to set the Output Scale: Units Index parameter to a value different from
the Transducer Scale: Units Index parameter, this has no effect on output. The Output Scale: Units
Index parameter is primarily useful as a label.
The output scale is a function of the AI blocks, and is only used when linearization is set to Indirect
(see Section 4.8). If you choose to use output scaling, note that it has no effect on the process values
found in the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This results in the following behaviors:
• ProLink II and the display use the process values in the MEASUREMENT transducer block.
Therefore, the output of a scaled AI block may differ from the value reported by other
communication tools.
• Slug flow and flow cutoffs are configured in the MEASUREMENT block. Therefore, output
scaling has no effect on the behavior of the transmitter with regard to slug flow or flow cutoffs.
Calibration
Example
To create a special unit for pints per second, the AI block assigned to channel 4 (volume) can be
configured as follows:
• Transducer Scale: Units Index = gal/s
• Transducer Scale: EU at 0% = 0
• Transducer Scale: EU at 100% = 100
• Output Scale: Units Index = pints
• Output Scale: EU at 0% = 0
• Output Scale: EU at 100% = 800
• Linearization Type = Indirect
Configuration
AI:Out Volume Flow:Value Display

16 pints/s 2 gal/s 2 gal/s

Configuration
You can change the output scale only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-20).
Figure 4-20 Output scaling – Fieldbus host
AI
Output Scale: EU at 0%
Output Scale: EU at 100%
Output Scale: EU at 0% – Set to process variable value at 0% of scale, in the configured units.
Output Scale: EU at 100% – Set to process variable value at 100% of scale, in the configured units.
4.10 Changing process alarms

The transmitter sends process alarms to indicate that a process value has exceeded its user-defined
limits. The transmitter maintains four alarm values for each process variable. Each alarm value has a
priority associated with it. In addition, the transmitter has an alarm hysteresis function to prevent
erratic alarm reports.
Note: Process alarms are only posted through the AI function block and are NOT shown on
the display or in ProLink II.
4.10.1 Alarm values

The process alarm values are the limits for process variables. Whenever a process variable exceeds a
process alarm value, the transmitter broadcasts an alarm to the fieldbus network.
Each AI function block has four process alarm values: high alarm, high-high alarm, low alarm, and
low-low alarm. See Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 Alarm values
High-high alarm
Process variable
High alarm
Normal process range
Low alarm
Low-low alarm
You can change the alarm values only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-22).

Configuration
Figure 4-22 Alarm values – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

High High Limit
High Limit
AI
Low Limit
Low Low Limit
High High Limit – Set to the value for the high-high alarm.
High Limit – Set to the value for the high alarm.
Low Limit – Set to the value for the low alarm.
Low Low Limit – Set to the value for the low-low alarm.
4.10.2 Alarm priorities
Startup
Each process alarm is assigned an alarm priority. A process alarm priority is a number from 0 to 15.
Higher numbers indicate higher alarm priorities. These values are for fieldbus network management
and do not affect transmitter operation.
You can change the process alarm priority values only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23 Alarm priorities – Fieldbus host
High High Priority
High Priority
AI
Low Priority
Calibration
Low Low Priority
High High Priority – Set to the priority for the high-high alarm.
High Priority – Set to the priority for the high alarm.
Low Priority – Set to the priority for the low alarm.
Low Low Priority – Set to the priority for the low-low alarm.
4.10.3 Alarm hysteresis

The alarm hysteresis value is a percentage of the output scale. After a process alarm is created, the
transmitter will not create new alarms unless the process first returns to a value within the range of the
alarm hysteresis percentage. Figure 4-24 shows the transmitter’s alarm behavior with an alarm
Configuration
hysteresis value of 50%.

Configuration
Note the following about hysteresis:

• A low hysteresis value allows the transmitter to broadcast a new alarm every time or nearly
every time the process variable crosses over the alarm limit.
• A high hysteresis value prevents the transmitter from broadcasting new alarms unless the
process variable first returns to a value sufficiently below the high alarm limit or above the low
alarm limit.
Figure 4-24 High versus low alarm hysteresis values
New alarms New alarm

not created created here
HIGH ALARM
Process variable
Alarm created
Hysteresis value
LOW ALARM
You can change the alarm hysteresis value only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-25).
Figure 4-25 Alarm hysteresis – Fieldbus host
AI
Alarm Hysteresis
Alarm Hysteresis – Set to the desired percentage of output scale, where scale is defined by either the
Transducer Scale or Output Scale values.

Configuration
4.11 Configuring status alarm severity

Status alarm severity does not affect the fieldbus alarm system (see Figure 4.10). The main function of
Before You Begin

status alarm severity in the Model 2700 with FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter is to control the
behavior of the display. See Section 5.4 for information about how the display indicates the severity of
alarms.
The severity level of some alarms can be reclassified. For example:
• The default severity level for Alarm A020 (calibration factors unentered) is Fault, but you can
reconfigure it to either Informational or Ignore.
• The default severity level for Alarm A102 (drive over-range) is Informational, but you can
reconfigure it to either Ignore or Fault.
A list of all status alarms and default severity levels is shown in Table 4-12. (For more information on
status alarms, including possible causes and troubleshooting suggestions, see Section 6.9.)
Table 4-12 Status alarms and severity levels
Default
Startup
Alarm code Description severity Configurable
A001 (E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP) Fault No
A002 RAM Error (CP) Fault No
A003 Sensor Failure Fault Yes
A004 Temperature Sensor Failure Fault No
A005 Input Overrange Fault Yes
A006 Not Configured Fault Yes
A008 Density Overrange Fault Yes
A009 Transmitter Initializing/warming Up Ignore Yes
A010 Calibration Failure Fault No
A011 Cal Fail - Too Low Fault Yes
A012 Cal Fail - Too High Fault Yes
Calibration
A013 Cal Fail - Too Noisy Fault Yes
A014 Transmitter Failed Fault No
A016 Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range Fault Yes
A017 Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range Fault Yes
A018 (E)EPROM Checksum Error Fault No
A019 RAM or ROM Test Error Fault No
A020 Calibration Factors Unentered Fault Yes
A021 Incorrect Sensor Type (K1) Fault No
A025 Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP) Fault No
A026 Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error Fault No
A028 Core Processor Write Failure Fault No
Configuration
A031 Low Power Fault No

(1)
A032 Smart Meter Verification In Progress and Outputs Fixed Fault No
A033 Sensor OK/Tubes Stopped by Process Fault Yes
A034 Smart Meter Verification Failed Informational Yes
A102 Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube Informational Yes
A103 Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv) Informational Yes

Configuration
Table 4-12 Status alarms and severity levels (continued)
Default
Alarm code Description severity Configurable
(2)
A104 Calibration-in-Progress Informational Yes
A105 Slug Flow Informational Yes
A106 AI/AO Simulation Active Informational No
A107 Power Reset Occurred Informational Yes
A116 API: Temperature Outside Standard Range Informational Yes
A117 API: Density Outside Standard Range Informational Yes
A120 CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data Informational No
A121 CM: Extrapolation Alarm Informational Yes
A131 Smart Meter Verification In Progress Informational Yes
A132 Simulation Mode Active Informational Yes
(1) The severity changes automatically based on the configured output state of a Smart Meter Verification test. If the output state is set
to Last Measured Value (LMV), the alarm severity will be Informational. If the output state is set to Fault, the alarm severity will be
Fault.
(2) Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to Fault.
Alarm severity can be configured with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-26) or ProLink II (Figure 4-27). Some
configurable alarms can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but not to Fault.
Figure 4-26 Alarm severity – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTICS
Alarm Index
Alarm Severity
Alarm Index – Select an alarm for which you want to modify the severity. (You must write to the
transmitter before the Alarm Severity parameter becomes available.)
Alarm Severity – Select a severity for the alarm indicated by the Alarm Index parameter.

Configuration
Figure 4-27 Alarm severity – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration
Select an alarm from
the Alarm list
Alarm tab
Select a severity from

the Severity list
Apply
Startup
4.12 Changing the damping values
A damping value is a period of time, in seconds, over which the process variable value will change to
reflect 63% of the change in the actual process. Damping helps the transmitter smooth out small,
rapid measurement fluctuations.
• A high damping value makes the output appear to be smoother because the output must change
slowly.
• A low damping value makes the output appear to be more erratic because the output changes
more quickly.
Damping can be configured for flow, density, and temperature using a fieldbus host (Figure 4-28) or
Note: There is also a damping parameter in each AI block called Process Value Filter Time. In order
Calibration
to avoid having two (potentially conflicting) damping values, you should set damping values only in
the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The Process Value Filter Time parameter for each AI block
should be set to 0.
When you specify a new damping value, it is automatically rounded down to the nearest valid
damping value. Valid damping values are listed in Table 4-13.
Note: For gas applications, Micro Motion recommends a minimum flow damping value of 2.56.
Before setting the damping values, review Section 4.12.1 for information on how the damping values
affect other transmitter measurements.
Table 4-13 Valid damping values
Process variable Valid damping values

Configuration
Flow (mass and volume) 0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 40.96

Density 0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 40.96
Temperature 0, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, ... 76.8

Configuration
Figure 4-28 Damping – Fieldbus host
Flow Damping
MEASUREMENT
Density Damping
Temperature Damping
Flow Damping – Set to the desired damping value for mass flow and volume flow measurement.
Density Damping – Set to the desired damping value for density measurement.
Temperature Damping – Set to the desired damping value for temperature measurement.
Figure 4-29 Damping – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab Density tab Temperature tab
Enter a damping value in Enter a damping value in Enter a damping value in

the Flow Damp box the Dens Damping box the Temp Damping box
Apply Apply Apply
4.12.1 Damping and volume measurement

When configuring damping values, note the following:
• Liquid volume flow is derived from mass and density measurements; therefore, any damping
applied to mass flow and density will affect liquid volume measurement.
• Gas standard volume flow is derived from mass flow measurement, but not from density
measurement. Therefore, only damping applied to mass flow will affect gas standard volume
measurement.
Be sure to set damping values accordingly.

Configuration
4.13 Changing slug flow limits and duration

Slugs—gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process—occasionally appear in some applications.
Before You Begin

The presence of slugs can significantly affect the process density reading. The slug flow parameters
can help the transmitter suppress extreme changes in process variables, and can also be used to
identify process conditions that require correction.
Slug flow parameters are as follows:
• Low slug flow limit — the point below which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically, this
is the lowest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is 0.0 g/cm3.
The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm3.
• High slug flow limit — the point above which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically,
this is the highest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is
5.0 g/cm3. The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm3.
• Slug flow duration — the number of seconds the transmitter waits for a slug flow condition to
clear. If the transmitter detects slug flow, it will post a slug flow alarm and hold its last
“pre-slug” flow rate until the end of the slug flow duration. If slugs are still present after the
slug flow duration has expired, the transmitter will report a flow rate of zero. The default value
Startup
for slug flow duration is 0.0 seconds. The valid range is 0.0–60.0 seconds.
Note: Raising the low slug flow limit or lowering the high slug flow limit will increase the possibility
that slug flow conditions will be detected by the transmitter.
Note: The slug flow limits must be entered in g/cm3, even if another unit has been configured for
density. Slug flow duration must be entered in seconds.
Slug flow can be configured using a fieldbus host (Figure 4-30) or ProLink II (Figure 4-31).
Figure 4-30 Slug flow settings – Fieldbus host
Slug Low Limit
Calibration
DIAGNOSTICS
Slug High Limit
Slug Duration
Slug Low Limit – Set to the density below which a condition of slug flow will exist.
Slug High Limit – Set to the density above which a condition of slug flow will exist.
Slug Duration – Set to the number of seconds to wait for a slug flow condition to clear before a slug flow
alarm is posted.
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-31 Slug flow settings – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Density tab
Set the density limits:

• Slug Low Limit
• Slug High Limit
Set the slug flow

duration in the Slug
Duration box
Apply
4.14 Configuring cutoffs

Cutoffs are user-defined values below which the transmitter reports a value of zero for the specified
process variable. Cutoffs can be set for mass flow, volume flow, gas standard volume flow, and
density.
Table 4-14 lists the default values and relevant comments for each cutoff. See Section 4.14.1 for
information on how the cutoffs interact with other transmitter measurements.
Table 4-14 Cutoff default values and comments
Cutoff Default value Comments

Mass 0.0 g/s Micro Motion recommends a mass flow cutoff value of 0.2% of the
sensor’s maximum flow rate for standard operation, and 2.5% of the
sensor’s maximum flow rate for empty-full-empty batching.
Liquid volume 0.0 L/s The lower limit for volume flow cutoff is 0. The upper limit for volume flow
cutoff is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, in L/s, multiplied by 0.2.
Gas standard 0.0 SCFM No limit
volume flow
Density 0.2 g/cm3 The range for density cutoff is 0.0–0.5 g/cm3
Cutoffs can be configured with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-32) or ProLink II (Figure 4-33).

Configuration
Figure 4-32 Cutoffs – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

Mass Flow Cutoff
Vol Flow Cutoff

MEASUREMENT
Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff
Density Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff – Set to the desired mass flow cutoff value.
Vol Flow Cutoff – Set to the desired (liquid) volume flow cutoff value.
Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff – Set to the desired (gas) volume flow cutoff value.
Density Cutoff – Set to the desired density cutoff value.
Figure 4-33 Cutoffs – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab Density tab
Enter values in the Mass

Enter a value in the
Flow Cutoff or Volume
Density Cutoff box
Flow Cutoff(1) boxes
Calibration
Apply Apply
(1) When volume flow is configured for gas standard volume, this box is labeled
Std gas vol flow cutoff.
4.14.1 Cutoffs and volume flow

If liquid volume flow is enabled:
• The density cutoff is applied to the volume flow calculation. Accordingly, if the density drops
below its configured cutoff value, the volume flow rate will go to zero.
Configuration
• The mass flow cutoff is not applied to the volume flow calculation. Even if the mass flow
drops below the cutoff, and therefore the mass flow indicators go to zero, the volume flow rate
will be calculated from the actual mass flow process variable.
If gas standard volume flow is enabled, neither the mass flow cutoff nor the density cutoff is applied
to the volume flow calculation.

Configuration
4.15 Changing the flow direction parameter

The flow direction parameter controls how the transmitter reports flow rate and how flow is added to
or subtracted from the totalizers.
• Forward (positive) flow moves in the direction of the arrow on the sensor.
• Reverse (negative) flow moves in the direction opposite of the arrow on the sensor.
Options for flow direction include:
• Forward Flow
• Reverse Flow
• Bi-directional
• Absolute Value
• Negate/Forward Only
• Negate/Bi-directional
The effect of each of these options is shown in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15 Transmitter behavior for each flow direction value
Forward flow Reverse flow

Flow direction Flow values on display Flow values on display
value Flow totals or via digital comm. Flow totals or via digital comm.
Forward only Increase Read positive No change Read negative
Reverse only No change Read positive Increase Read negative
Bi-directional Increase Read positive Decrease Read negative
(1)
Absolute value Increase Read positive Increase Read positive(1)
Negate/forward only No change Read negative Increase Read positive
Negate/bi-directional Decrease Read negative Increase Read positive
(1) Refer to the digital communications status bits for an indication of whether flow is positive or negative.
You can change the flow direction parameter with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-34) or ProLink II
(Figure 4-35).
Figure 4-34 Flow direction parameter – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Flow Direction
Flow Direction – Set to the desired value (refer to Flow direction value in Table 4-15).

Configuration
Figure 4-35 Flow direction parameter – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
See Table 4-15 for flow

Select a value from direction values.
the Flow Direction
list
Apply
Startup
4.16 Changing device settings
The device settings are used to describe the flowmeter components. The following information can be
entered:
• Tag
• Message
• Date
These parameters are for user convenience and network management. They are not used in transmitter
processing, and are not required.
You can set the tag with a fieldbus host by using the host’s tagging features. You can set the tag,
message, and date with ProLink II (Figure 4-36).
Calibration
CAUTION
Setting the software tag via ProLink II will cause the transmitter to restart.
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-36 Device settings – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Device (Fieldbus) tab
Enter information in
the boxes provided
Apply
If you are entering a date, use the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar shown in ProLink II
to select the year and month, then click on a date.
4.17 Configuring sensor parameters

The sensor parameters are used to describe the sensor component of your flowmeter. These sensor
parameters are not used in transmitter processing, and are not required:
• Serial number
• Sensor material
• Liner material
• Flange
You can configure the sensor parameters with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-37) or ProLink II
(Figure 4-38).
Figure 4-37 Sensor parameters – Fieldbus host
Sensor Serial Number
Sensor Material
DEVICE
INFORMATION Liner Material
Flange
Sensor Serial Number – Enter the sensor serial number.

Sensor Material Select the sensor material.
Liner Material Select the liner material.
Flange Select the flange.

Configuration
Figure 4-38 Sensor parameters – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration Select the liner
material from the
Liner Matl list
Sensor tab
Select the flange from
the Flange list
Enter the sensor
serial number in the
Sensor s/n box
Apply
Select the sensor

serial material from
the Sensor Matl list
Startup
4.18 Changing the display functionality
You can restrict the display functionality or change the variables that are shown on the display.
4.18.1 Enabling and disabling display functions

Display function are listed in Table 4-16.
Table 4-16 Display functions and parameters
Calibration
Display Fieldbus
function parameter Display code Enabled Disabled
(1)
Totalizer reset Totalizer reset TOTAL RESET Resetting mass and volume Resetting mass and
totalizers is permitted. volume totalizers is not
possible.
Totalizer start/stop Totalizer start/stop TOTAL STOP Operator can start and stop Operator cannot start or
totalizers from the display. stop totalizers.
Auto scroll(2) Auto scroll AUTO SCRLL Display automatically Operator must Scroll to
scrolls through each view process variables.
process variable.
Offline menu Offline menu DISPLAY OFFLN Operator has access to the No access to the offline
offline menu. menu.
Alarm menu Alarm menu DISPLAY ALARM Operator has access to No access to the alarm
alarm menu. menu.
ACK all alarms ACK all alarms DISPLAY ACK Operator can acknowledge Alarms must be
Configuration
all current alarms at once. acknowledged individually.

Offline password(3) Offline password CODE OFFLN Password required for Offline menu accessible
offline menu. See without a password.
Section 4.18.4

Configuration
Table 4-16 Display functions and parameters (continued)
Display Fieldbus
function parameter Display code Enabled Disabled
Display backlight Display backlight DISPLAY BKLT Display backlight is ON. Display backlight is OFF.
Status LED Status LED Not accessible via Status LED will blink when Status LED will not blink.
blinking blinking the display there are unacknowledged
alarms active.
Alarm password(3) Alarm password CODE ALARM Password required for Alarm menu accessible
alarms menu. without a password.
(1) If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password is always required to start, stop, or
reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password
is never required for these functions, even if one of the display passwords is enabled.
(2) If enabled, you may want to configure Scroll Rate. See Section 4.18.2.
(3) If enabled, the display password must also be configured. See Section 4.18.4.
Note the following:

• If you use the display to disable access to the off-line menu, the off-line menu will disappear
as soon as you exit the menu system. If you want to re-enable access, you must use a different
method (e.g., ProLink II).
• If you are using the display to configure the display:
- You must enable Auto Scroll before you can configure Scroll Rate.
- You must enable the off-line password before you can configure the password.
You can enable and disable the display parameters with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-39), ProLink II
(Figure 4-40), or the display (Figure 4-41).
Figure 4-39 Display functions – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
* – Refer to the fieldbus parameters in Table 4-16. Each parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

Configuration
Figure 4-40 Display functions – ProLink II
Before You Begin

ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enable or disable
functions using the
checkboxes
Apply
Startup
Calibration
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-41 Display functions – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
TOTALS RESET CODE OFFLN(3)
OFF-LINE MAINT
Scroll Scroll
Select
TOTALS STOP CODE ALARM(3)
Scroll
Scroll Scroll
CONFG
DISPLAY OFFLN(1) DISPLAY BKLT

Select
Scroll Scroll
UNITS
DISPLAY ALARM EXIT

Scroll
Select Scroll
DISPLAY
DISPLAY ACK
Scroll
Scroll
AUTO SCRLL(2)
(1) If you disable access to the offline menu, the offline menu will disappear as soon as you exit. To re-enable access, you must
use a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
(2) If Auto Scroll is enabled, a Scroll Rate screen is displayed immediately after the Auto Scroll screen.
(3) If either password is enabled, a Change Code screen will be displayed so that the password can be configured.
4.18.2 Changing the scroll rate

The scroll rate is used to control the speed of scrolling when auto scroll is enabled. Scroll rate defines
how long each display variable will be shown on the display. The time period is defined in seconds
(e.g., if scroll rate is set to 10, each display variable will be shown on the display for 10 seconds). The
valid range is from 0 to 10 seconds.
You can change the scroll rate with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-42) or ProLink II (Figure 4-43).

Configuration
Figure 4-42 Scroll rate – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Scroll Rate
Display Scroll Rate – Set to the number of seconds each variable should be displayed.
Figure 4-43 Scroll rate – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Startup
Display tab
Enter number of
seconds in Auto
Scroll Rate box
Apply
Calibration
4.18.3 Changing the update period
The update period (or display rate) parameter controls how often the display is refreshed with current
data. The default is 200 milliseconds. The range is 100 to 10000 milliseconds. The update period
value applies to all displayed process variables.
You can change the update period with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-44), ProLink II (Figure 4-45), or the
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-44 Update period – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
Update rate
Update Rate – Set to the number of milliseconds between updates to the display (100 to 10000,
default is 200).
Figure 4-45 Update period – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enter a value
between 100 and
10000 milliseconds in
the Update Period
box
Apply

Configuration
Figure 4-46 Update period – Display
Before You Begin

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll TOTALS RESET
CONFG Scroll
Select
DISPLAY RATE
UNITS
Select
Startup
Select
Scroll
Enter a value between
100 and 10000
DISPLAY milliseconds
4.18.4 Changing the display password

The display password is a numeric code that can contain up to four digits. It is used for both the
off-line menu password and the alarm menu password. See Section G.4.4 for information on how the
two passwords are implemented.
If you are using the display, you must enable either the off-line password or the alarm screen
Calibration
password before you can configure the password (see Section 4.18.1).
Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password
is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the
petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these
functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.
You can change the password with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-47), Prolink II (Figure 4-48), or the
Figure 4-47 Display password – Fieldbus host

Configuration
LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Offline Password
Display Offline Password – Enter a 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999.

Configuration
Figure 4-48 Display password – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enter a 4-digit
password in the
Offline Password
box
Apply
Figure 4-49 Display password – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
Select
OFF-LINE MAINT
Scroll
Select
Scroll CODE OFFLN(1) (1) Select CODE OFFLN to

enable the display
password. This will
CONFG Scroll enable the CHANGE
CODE option, which is
used to set the display
Select password.
CHANGE CODE
UNITS
Select
Scroll
Enter a new password.

DISPLAY

Configuration
4.18.5 Changing the display variables and precision

The display can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order. You can select the process
Before You Begin

variables you wish to see and the order in which they should appear.
Additionally, you can configure display precision for each display variable. Display precision
controls the number of digits to the right of the decimal place. The range of the display precision
is 0 to 5.
Note: If you change the volume flow type from Liquid Volume to Gas Standard Volume (see
Section 4.3), any display variables configured for volume flow will change automatically to GSV flow.
Likewise, if you change the volume flow type from Gas Standard Volume to Liquid Volume, any
display variables configured for GSV flow will change automatically to volume flow.
Table 4-17 shows an example of a display variable configuration. Notice that you can repeat variables,
and you can choose a value of “None.” The actual appearance of each process variable on the display
is described in Appendix G.
Table 4-17 Example of a display variable configuration
Startup
Display variable Process variable
Display variable 1 Mass flow
Display variable 2 Volume flow
Display variable 3 Density
Display variable 6 Mass totalizer
Display variable 8 Temperature
Display variable 10 Volume totalizer
Display variable 11 Density
Calibration
Display variable 12 Temperature
Display variable 13 None
You can change the display variables and precision with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-50) or ProLink II
(Figure 4-51).
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-50 Display variables – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Variable 1 through Display Variable 15
Number of Decimals
Display Variable 1...15 – Set each parameter to an available process variable.

Number of Decimals – Set to the number of decimal places to be shown on the display.
Figure 4-51 Display variables – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Select a process Enter a value in the

variable from each Number of Decimals
drop-down list box
Apply
4.18.6 Changing the display language

The display can be configured to use any of the following languages for data and menus:
• English
• French
• German
• Spanish
The display language can be configured using a fieldbus host (Figure 4-52), ProLink II (Figure 4-53),
or the display (Figure 4-54).

Configuration
Figure 4-52 Display language – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

LOCAL DISPLAY
Language
Language – Set to the desired display language.
Figure 4-53 Display language – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Startup
Display tab
Select a language
from the Display
Language list
Apply
Calibration
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-54 Display language – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll TOTALS RESET
OFF-LINE MAINT Scroll
Select
DISPLAY LANG
Scroll
Select
CONFG
ENG
Select
Scroll
UNITS
FREN
Scroll Select
Scroll
DISPLAY
GER
Scroll
SPAN
4.19 Configuring PlantWeb Alert timeout

PlantWeb Alerts (see Appendix A) can have a timeout value applied to them. The timeout delays a
PlantWeb Alert from being sent for the specified number of seconds. The timeout also prevents AI
blocks from going into fault (i.e., the process quality remains Good until the timeout expires). The
valid range is 0–300 seconds.
PlantWeb Alert timeouts can be set with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-55) or ProLink II (Figure 4-56).

Configuration
Figure 4-55 PlantWeb Alert timeout – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin

DIAGNOSTICS
Alert Timeout
Alert Timeout – Set to the desired timeout value (0–300 seconds).
Figure 4-56 PlantWeb Alert timeout – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Startup
Enter a value in the

Fieldbus Alert
Timeout box
Apply
Calibration
4.20 Configuring write-protect mode
When the transmitter is in write-protect mode, the configuration data stored in the transmitter and
core processor cannot be changed until write-protect mode is disabled.
You can configure write-protect mode with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-57), ProLink II (Figure 4-58), or
the display (Figure 4-58).
Figure 4-57 Write-protect mode – Fieldbus host
RESOURCE
Configuration
Write Lock
Write Lock – Set to Locked to write-protect the transmitter. Set to Not Locked to allow configuration.

Configuration
Figure 4-58 Write-protect mode – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Select the Enable

Write Protection
checkbox
Apply
Figure 4-59 Write-protect mode – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFIG LOCK
Select
ENABL/DISABL

Configuration
4.21 Enabling LD Optimization

LD Optimization is a special compensation is that is specifically for hydrocarbon liquids. LD
Before You Begin

Optimization should not be used with any other process fluids. LD Optimization is available only with
certain large sensor sizes. If your sensor can benefit from LD Optimization, the enable/disable option
will appear in ProLink II or on the display.
CAUTION
If you send the transmitter to a calibration facility to perform a water
calibration, either during startup or any time thereafter, LD Optimization
must be disabled. When you have completed the calibration, re-enable LD
Optimization.
To enable LD Optimization, see Figures 4-60 and 4-61.
Figure 4-60 LD Optimization – ProLink II
Startup
Calibration
Configuration

Configuration
Figure 4-61 LD Optimization – Display

for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFG
Select
FACTOR LD
Scroll
Scroll Select Select
MTR F LD OPT

Chapter 5
Operation
Operation
5.1 Overview
This section describes how to use the transmitter in everyday operation. The procedures in this section
will enable you to use a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II to:
• View process variables (Section 5.2)
• Use simulation mode (Section 5.3)
Troubleshooting
• Respond to alarms (Section 5.4)
• Use the totalizers and inventories (Section 5.5)
and F.
5.2 Viewing process variables

Process variables include measurements such as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, mass total, volume
total, temperature, density, and drive gain.
You can view process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.
With a fieldbus host
PlantWeb Alerts
The transmitter has four fieldbus AI function blocks. Each AI function block reports the value of one
process variable, the associated units of measure, and a status value that indicates measurement
quality. For more information on the function blocks, refer to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks
manual, available at the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com).
To view a process variable, select the AI function block that measures that variable, and read the Out
parameter. The output of AI blocks may be influenced by output scaling (see Section 4.9).
You can also view each process variable by reading the MEASUREMENT transducer block
parameter for each process variable. Table 5-1 lists the process variables that correspond to each
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter.
TB Reference

Operation
Table 5-1 Process variable parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer block
Process variable Transducer block parameter

Mass-flow rate Mass Flow: Value
Volume-flow rate Volume Flow: Value
Temperature Temperature: Value
Density Density: Value
(1)
Gas standard volume Gas Volume Flow Rate: Value
(1) Gas standard volume is not available if either the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement
application is enabled.
With the display

Refer to Appendix G for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.
The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
With ProLink II software

To view process variables with ProLink II, choose ProLink > Process Variables.
5.2.1 Viewing API process variables

You can view petroleum measurement (API) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or
ProLink II.

If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the API variable channels (see Section 2.3),
you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.
You can also view all of the API variables by examining their parameters in the API transducer block.
Table 5-2 lists the API process variables that correspond to each API transducer block parameter.
Table 5-2 API process variables by API transducer block parameter
API process variable API transducer block parameter

Temperature corrected density API Corr Density: Value
Temperature corrected (standard) volume flow API Corr Volume Flow: Value
Batch weighted average density API Ave Density: Value
Batch weighted average temperature API Ave Temperature: Value

Operation
With the display

Operation
To view API process variables with ProLink II software, choose ProLink > API Process Variables.
5.2.2 Viewing concentration measurement process variables

You can view concentration measurement (CM) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or
ProLink II.

If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the CM variable channels (see Section 2.3),
you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.
Troubleshooting
You can also view all of the CM variables by examining their parameters in the CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT transducer block. Table 5-2 lists the CM process variables that correspond to each
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter.
Table 5-3 CM process variables by CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT
CM process variable transducer block parameter
Density at reference CM Density At Ref: Value
Density (fixed specific gravity units) CM Density SG: Value
Standard volume flow rate CM Std Volume Flow: Value
Net mass flow rate CM Net Mass Flow: Value
Concentration CM Concentration: Value
PlantWeb Alerts
With the display

To view CM process variables with ProLink II, choose ProLink > CM Process Variables.
5.3 Simulation mode

The transmitter has two simulation modes:
• Fieldbus simulation mode
• Sensor simulation mode
TB Reference
5.3.1 Fieldbus simulation mode

The transmitter has a “simulate enable” switch that causes the transmitter to function in simulation
mode as defined in the FOUNDATION fieldbus function block specification. This switch is
software-selectable via a fieldbus host (Figure 5-1) or ProLink II (Figure 5-2).

Operation
Figure 5-1 Fieldbus simulation mode – Fieldbus host
DEVICE
INFORMATION
Simulate Mode
Simulate Mode – Set to Enabled to activate simulation mode.
Figure 5-2 Fieldbus simulation mode – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Select Simulate
Mode
Apply
5.3.2 Sensor simulation mode

Sensor simulation mode causes simulated values to be substituted for actual process data from the
sensor. Sensor simulation mode can be enabled only with ProLink II (Figure 5-3).

Operation
Figure 5-3 Sensor simulation mode – ProLink II
Operation
ProLink >
Configuration Select a wave form
for mass flow,
density, and
temperature from the
Sensor Simulation tab Wave Form lists
Triangular or
Select Enable Fixed wave
sine wave
Simulation Mode
Enter a value in the Enter period in the
Troubleshooting
Fixed Value box Period box
Enter minimum and

maximum amplitude
in the Minimum and
Maximum boxes
Apply
5.4 Responding to alarms
PlantWeb Alerts
The transmitter broadcasts alarms when a process variable exceeds its defined limits or the transmitter
detects a fault condition. For instructions regarding all the possible alarms, see Section 6.9.
5.4.1 Viewing alarms

You can view alarms with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II software.

The transmitter sets its fieldbus output status to bad or uncertain whenever an alarm condition occurs.
A PlantWeb Alert may also be posted. (See Appendix A for information about PlantWeb Alerts.)
When the output status is bad or uncertain, you can view an alarm by reading the following alarm
parameters:
• Each AI function block contains a parameter called Block Error that contains the alarm bits for
TB Reference
that AI block.
• The DIAGNOSTICS transducer block contains four parameters named Alarm Status 1
through Alarm Status 4. Each of these parameters has a short list of alarm bits (see
Appendix B).

Operation
With the display

The display reports alarms in two ways:
• With a status LED, which reports only that one or more alarms has occurred
• Through the alarm queue, which reports each specific alarm
Note: If access to the alarm menu from the display has been disabled (see Section 4.18), then the
display will not list alarm codes in an alarm queue and the status LED will not flash. The status LED
will indicate status using solid green, yellow, or red.
The status LED is located at the top of the display (Figure 5-4). The status LED can be in one of six
possible states, as listed in Table 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Display alarm menu
Status LED
Table 5-4 Priorities reported by the status LED
Status LED state Alarm priority

Green No alarm—normal operating mode
(1)
Flashing green Unacknowledged corrected condition
Yellow Acknowledged low severity alarm
(1)
Flashing yellow Unacknowledged low severity alarm
Red Acknowledged high severity alarm
Flashing red(1) Unacknowledged high severity alarm
(1) If the LED blinking option is turned off (see Section 4.18.1), the status LED will flash only during calibration. It will not
flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.
Alarms in the alarm queue are arranged according to priority. To view specific alarms in the queue,
see Figure 5-5.

Operation
Figure 5-5 Viewing and acknowledging alarms – Display
Operation
for 4 seconds
SEE ALARM
Select
(1) ACK ALL will appear only if

ACK ALL(1) it has been enabled.
See Section 4.18.
Yes No
Select Scroll
Troubleshooting
EXIT
Select Scroll
Active/
unacknowledged
alarms?
Yes No
Alarm code NO ALARM
PlantWeb Alerts
Scroll Select Scroll
ACK EXIT
Yes No
Select Scroll
TB Reference

Operation
With ProLink II
ProLink II provides two ways to view alarm information:
• Choose ProLink > Status. This window shows the current status of all possible alarms,
independent of configured alarm severity. The alarms are divided into three categories:
Critical, Informational, and Operational. To view the indicators in a category, click on the
associated tab. A tab is red if one or more status indicators in that category is active. On each
tab, currently active alarms are shown by red indicators.
• Choose ProLink > Alarm Log. This window lists all active alarms, and all inactive but
unacknowledged Fault and Informational alarms. (The transmitter automatically filters out
Ignore alarms.) A green indicator means “inactive but unacknowledged” and a red indicator
means “active.” Alarms are organized into two categories: High Priority and Low Priority.
Note: The location of alarms in the Status and Alarm Log windows are not affected by the configured
alarm severity (see Section 4.11). Alarms in the Status window are predefined as Critical,
Informational, or Operational. Alarms in the Alarm Log window are predefined as High Priority or
Low Priority.
5.4.2 Acknowledging alarms

You can acknowledge alarms using ProLink II or the display. For transmitters with a display, access to
the alarm menu can be enabled or disabled, and a password may be required. If access to the alarm
menu is enabled, the operator may be disallowed from acknowledging all alarms simultaneously (the
Ack All? function). See Section 4.18.1 for information on controlling these functions.
If the LED blinking option has been turned off, the status LED will not flash to indicate
unacknowledged alarms. Alarms can still be acknowledged.
To acknowledge alarms using the display:
1. Activate and hold Scroll and Select simultaneously until the words SEE ALARM appear on
the screen. See Figure 5-4.
2. Select.
3. If the words NO ALARM appear, go to Step 8.
4. If you want to acknowledge all alarms:
a. Scroll until the word ACK appears by itself. The word ACK begins to alternate with the
word ALL?.
b. Select.
Note: If the “acknowledge all alarms” feature has been disabled (see Section 4.18.1, then you must
acknowledge each alarm individually. See Step 5.
5. If you want to acknowledge a single alarm:
a. Scroll until the alarm you want to acknowledge appears.
b. Select. The word ALARM begins to alternate with the word ACK.
c. Select to acknowledge the alarm.
6. If you want to acknowledge another alarm, go to Step 3.
7. If you do NOT want to acknowledge any more alarms, go to Step 8.
8. Scroll until the word EXIT appears.
9. Select.

Operation
To acknowledge alarms using ProLink II:

1. Click ProLink > Alarm Log. Entries in the alarm log are divided into two categories: High
Priority and Low Priority, corresponding to the default Fault and Information alarm severity
Operation
levels. Within each category:
• All active alarms are listed with a red status indicator.
• All alarms that are “cleared but unacknowledged” are listed with a green status indicator.
2. For each alarm that you want to acknowledge, select the ACK checkbox.
5.5 Using the totalizers and inventories

The totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter over a
period of time. The totalizers can be viewed, started, stopped, and reset.
The inventories track the same values as the totalizers but can be reset separately. Because the
inventories and totals are reset separately, you can use the inventories to keep a running total of mass
or volume across multiple totalizer resets.
Troubleshooting
5.5.1 Viewing the totalizers and inventories
You can view the current value of the mass totalizer, volume totalizer, mass inventory, and volume
inventory with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.

If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers or
inventories (see Section 2.4), you can simply read the Out parameter of the INT function block.
You can also view any of the internal totalizers or inventories by inspecting their respective transducer
block parameters. See Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Totalizer and inventory parameter names
PlantWeb Alerts
Totalizer/inventory Transducer block Parameter name
Mass totalizer MEASUREMENT Mass Total: Value
Volume totalizer MEASUREMENT Volume Total: Value
Mass inventory MEASUREMENT Mass Inventory: Value
Volume Inventory MEASUREMENT Volume Inventory: Value
(1)
Reference volume gas total MEASUREMENT Gas Volume Total: Value
(1)
Reference volume gas inventory MEASUREMENT Gas Volume Inventory: Value
Temperature corrected volume total API API Corr Volume Total: Value
Temperature corrected volume inventory API API Corr Vol Inventory: Value
(2)
Standard volume total CONCENTRATION CM Std Volume Total: Value
MEASUREMENT
Standard volume inventory(2) CONCENTRATION CM Std Vol Inventory: Value
TB Reference
MEASUREMENT
Net mass total(2) CONCENTRATION CM Net Mass Total: Value
MEASUREMENT

Operation
Table 5-5 Totalizer and inventory parameter names (continued)
Totalizer/inventory Transducer block Parameter name

Net mass inventory(2) CONCENTRATION CM Net Mass Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
Net volume total(2) CONCENTRATION CM Net Volume Total: Value
MEASUREMENT
Net volume inventory(2) CONCENTRATION CM Net Vol Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
(1) Not valid when the petroleum measurement or concentration measurement applications are active.
(2) Not all of these totals are available at one time. The available totals depend on the concentration measurement application
configuration.
With the display

You cannot view totalizers or inventories with the display unless the display has been configured to
show them. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
1. To view totalizer values, Scroll until the process variable TOTAL appears and the units of
measure are:
• For the mass totalizer, mass units (e.g., kg, lb)
• For the volume totalizer, volume units (e.g., gal, cuft)
• For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement totalizers, the mass or volume
unit alternating with the process variable (e.g., TCORR or NET M) (see Table G-1).
See Figure 5-6. Read the current value from the top line of the display.
2. To view inventory values, Scroll until the process variable TOTAL appears and:
• For the mass inventory, the word MASSI (Mass Inventory) begins to alternate with the
units of measure
• For the volume inventory, the word LVOLI (Line Volume Inventory) begins to alternate
with the units of measure
• For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement inventories, the mass or
volume unit alternating with the process variable (e.g., TCORI or NET VI) (see Table G-1).
See Figure 5-6. Read the current value from the top line of the display.

Operation
Figure 5-6 Display totalizer
Operation
Current value
Process variable
Units of measure
Scroll optical switch

Select optical switch
Troubleshooting
With ProLink II
To view the current value of the totalizers and inventories with ProLink II, choose:
• ProLink > Process Variables to view standard totalizers and inventories
• ProLink > API Process Variables to view API totalizers and inventories
• ProLink > CM Process Variables to view CM totalizers and inventories
5.5.2 Controlling the totalizers and inventories

Table 5-6 shows all of the totalizer functions and which configuration tools you can use to
control them.
PlantWeb Alerts
Table 5-6 Totalizer and inventory control methods
Function Name Fieldbus host Prolink II Display(1)

Stop all totalizers and inventories Yes Yes Yes
Start all totalizers and inventories Yes Yes Yes
Reset mass or volume totalizer only Yes Yes Yes(2)
Reset API totalizer only Yes No Yes(2)
Reset CM totalizer only Yes Yes Yes(2)
Reset all totalizers Yes Yes No
(3)
Reset all inventories Yes Yes No
(3)
Reset individual inventories Yes Yes No
(1) These display functions may be enabled or disabled. See Section 4.18.
TB Reference
(2) This function is available only if the corresponding totalizer is configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).
(3) If enabled in the ProLink II preferences.

Operation

If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers (i.e., not
Standard mode) (see Section 2.4), you can reset that totalizer by selecting the INT function block and
setting the OP_CMD_INT method parameter to Reset.
You can also control the internal totalizers directly by using the method parameters shown in
Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 Totalizer/inventory control – Fieldbus host
Select this
To accomplish this transducer block And use this method parameter
Stop all totalizers and inventories MEASUREMENT Stop All Totals
Start all totalizers and inventories MEASUREMENT Start Totals
Reset mass totalizer MEASUREMENT Reset Mass Total
Reset volume totalizer MEASUREMENT Reset Volume Total
Reset gas volume totalizer MEASUREMENT Reset Gas Standard Volume Total
Reset API totalizer API Reset API Volume Total
Reset CM standard volume totalizer CONCENTRATION Reset CM Std Volume Total
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM net mass totalizer CONCENTRATION Reset CM Net Mass Total
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM net volume totalizer CONCENTRATION Reset CM Net Volume Total
MEASUREMENT
Reset mass inventory MEASUREMENT Reset Mass Inventory
Reset volume inventory MEASUREMENT Reset Volume Inventory
Reset gas volume inventory MEASUREMENT Reset Gas Standard Volume Inventory
Reset API inventory API Reset API Inventory
Reset CM standard volume inventory CONCENTRATION Reset CM Volume Inventory
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM net mass inventory CONCENTRATION Reset CM Net Mass Inventory
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM net volume inventory CONCENTRATION Reset CM Net Volume Inventory
MEASUREMENT
Simultaneously reset all totalizers MEASUREMENT Reset Totalizers
Simultaneously reset all inventories MEASUREMENT Reset Inventories
With Prolink II
To control CM totalizers and inventories, choose ProLink > CM Totalizer Control. To control all
other totalizer and inventory functions, choose ProLink > Totalizer Control.
To reset inventories using ProLink II, you must first enable this capability. To enable inventory reset
using ProLink II:
1. Choose View > Preferences.
2. Select the Enable Inventory Totals Reset checkbox.
3. Click Apply.

Operation
With the display

Figure 5-7 shows how you can control the totalizers and inventories with the display.
Operation
• Starting or stopping totalizers and inventories will start or stop all totalizers and inventories
simultaneously.
• Resetting totalizers resets only the totalizer for which the reset is selected. Inventories cannot
be reset using the display.
Figure 5-7 Display menu — controlling totalizers and inventories
Process variable
display
Scroll
API total(1)(2)
Troubleshooting
Mass total display(1) Scroll Volume total display(1)
ED total(1)(2)
Select
RESET(3) Scroll STOP/START(4) Scroll EXIT
Select Select
RESET YES? STOP/START YES?
PlantWeb Alerts
Yes No Yes No
Select Scroll Select Scroll
(1) Displayed only if configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).

(2) The petroleum measurement application or concentration measurement application must be enabled.
(3) The display must be configured to allow totalizer resetting (see Section 4.18).
(4) The display must be configured to allow stopping and starting (see Section 4.18).
TB Reference

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Operation
6.1 Overview
This section describes guidelines and procedures for troubleshooting the flowmeter. The information
in this section will enable you to:
• Categorize the problem
• Determine whether you are able to correct the problem
Troubleshooting
• Take corrective measures (if possible)
and F.
6.2 Guide to troubleshooting topics

Refer to Table 6-1 for a list of troubleshooting topics discussed in this chapter.
Table 6-1 Troubleshooting topics
Topic Section
Transmitter does not operate Section 6.3
PlantWeb Alerts
Transmitter does not communicate Section 6.4
Zero or calibration failure Section 6.5
AI block configuration error Section 6.6
Output problems Section 6.7
Lost static data alarm Section 6.8
Status alarms Section 6.9
Diagnosing wiring problems Section 6.10
Checking slug flow Section 6.11
Restoring a working configuration Section 6.12
Checking the test points Section 6.13
Checking the core processor Section 6.14
Checking sensor coils and RTD Section 6.15
TB Reference
6.3 Transmitter does not operate

If the transmitter is receiving power but all blocks are out of service, see Section 6.8.
If the transmitter is not receiving power and cannot communicate over the network or display, then
perform all of the procedures under Section 6.10. If the wiring checks do not indicate a problem with
electrical connections, contact the Micro Motion Customer Service Department.

Troubleshooting
6.4 Transmitter does not communicate

If the transmitter fails to communicate:
• Make sure that the entire fieldbus network is grounded only once (individual segments should
not be grounded).
• Perform the procedures under Section 6.10.4.
• If you are using a National Instruments® Configurator, perform the procedures under
Section 6.4.1.
• Verify the software version by reading the display at power up.
• Verify the transmitter has fieldbus software loaded into it. At power up, the local display will
briefly flash the revision level. For revision 1.0, 1.0 is displayed. For other revisions, x.x F is
displayed.
6.4.1 National Instruments basic information

To verify the Dlme Basic Info:
1. Launch the National Instruments Interface Configuration Utility.
2. Select the appropriate port, usually Port 0.
3. Click Edit.
4. Click Advanced.
5. Verify the following information:
• Slot Time equals 8
• Max Response Time equals 10
• Dlpdu Ph1 Overhead equals 4
• Min Inter-Pdu Delay equals 12
• Time Sync Class equals 1 ms
6.5 Zero or calibration failure

If a zero or calibration procedure fails, the transmitter will send one or more status alarms indicating
the cause of failure. Refer to Table 6-3 for descriptions of status alarms and possible remedies.
6.6 AI block configuration error

Configuring the measurement units with ProLink II or the display can cause the transmitter’s AI
blocks to get a configuration error unless the AI blocks are also configured for the same measurement
units. This is because ProLink II and the display set measurement units in the MEASUREMENT
transducer block, not in the AI block. Therefore, if the units have been configured with ProLink II or
the display, the AI blocks must be separately configured to match.
See Section 4.4 for more information about configuring measurement units.

Troubleshooting
6.7 Output problems

Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of the process variables listed below, under normal
operating conditions. This will help you recognize when the process variables are unusually high
Operation
or low.
• Flow rate
• Density
• Temperature
• Tube frequency
• Pickoff voltage
• Drive gain
For troubleshooting, check the process variables under both normal flow and tubes-full no-flow
conditions. Except for flow rate, you should see little or no change between flow and no-flow
conditions. If you see a significant difference, record the values and contact Micro Motion Customer
Service for assistance.
Troubleshooting
Unusual values for process variables may indicate a variety of different problems. Table 6-2 lists
several possible problems and remedies.
Table 6-2 Output problems and possible remedies
Symptom Cause Possible remedies

AI block fault Measurement units mismatch Make sure the Transducer Scale: Units
Index parameter matches the units
specified in the transducer block for that
process variable.
No output or incorrect process AI Channel parameter set incorrectly Verify the AI Channel parameter in the AI
variable block matches the correct transducer
block measurement channels.
Steady non-zero flow rate under Misaligned piping (especially in new Correct the piping.
PlantWeb Alerts
no-flow conditions installations)
Open or leaking valve Check or correct the valve mechanism.
Bad sensor zero Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
Bad flow calibration factor Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
TB Reference

Troubleshooting
Table 6-2 Output problems and possible remedies (continued)

Erratic non-zero flow rate under Wiring problem Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
no-flow conditions ensure the wires are making good
contact. Refer to the installation manual.
Incorrectly grounded 9-wire cable Verify 9-wire cable installation.
(only in 9-wire remote and remote Refer to the installation manual.
core processor with remote
transmitter installations)
Noise in fieldbus wiring Verify that the wiring is properly shielded
against noise. Refer to the installation
manual.
Incorrectly set or bad power See Section 6.7.6.
conditioner
Vibration in pipeline at rate close to Check the environment and remove the
sensor frequency source of vibration.
Leaking valve or seal Check pipeline.
Inappropriate measurement unit Check measurement units using a
fieldbus host.
Inappropriate damping value Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.
Slug flow See Section 6.11.
Plugged flow tube Check drive gain and frequency. Purge the
flow tubes.
Moisture in sensor junction box (only Open junction box and allow it to dry. Do
for 9-wire remote and remote core not use contact cleaner. When closing,
processor with remote transmitter ensure integrity of gaskets and O-rings,
installations) and grease all O-rings.
Mounting stress on sensor Check sensor mounting. Ensure that:
• Sensor is not being used to support
pipe.
• Sensor is not being used to correct
misaligned pipe.
• Sensor is not too heavy for pipe.
Sensor cross-talk Check environment for sensor with similar
(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Improper sensor grounding Check the sensor grounding. Refer to the
installation manual.
Incorrect sensor orientation Not all orientations work with all process
fluids. See the installation manual for your
sensor.
Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow Output wiring problem Verify fieldbus wiring.
is steady
fieldbus tool.
Inappropriate damping value Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.
Excessive or erratic drive gain See Sections 6.13.3 and 6.13.4.
Plugged flow tube Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to
be replaced.
Wiring problem Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
ensure the wires are making good

Troubleshooting
Table 6-2 Output problems and possible remedies (continued)
Operation
Inaccurate flow rate Bad flow calibration factor Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
fieldbus host.
Bad sensor zero Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
Bad density calibration factors Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Bad flowmeter grounding See Section 6.10.3.
Incorrectly set linearization See Section 6.7.7.
Inaccurate density reading Problem with process fluid Use standard procedures to check quality
Troubleshooting
of process fluid.
Bad density calibration factors Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Bad flowmeter grounding See Section 6.10.3.
Sensor cross-talk Check environment for sensor with similar
(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Plugged flow tube Check drive gain and tube frequency.
be replaced.
Temperature reading significantly RTD failure Check for alarm conditions and follow
different from process temperature troubleshooting procedure for indicated
alarm.
PlantWeb Alerts
Incorrect calibration factors Perform temperature calibration. See
Section 3.7.
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Temperature reading slightly different Incorrect calibration factors Perform temperature calibration. See
from process temperature Section 3.7.
Unusually high density reading Plugged flow tube Check drive gain and tube frequency.
be replaced.
Incorrect K2 value Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Unusually low density reading Slug flow See Section 6.11.
Incorrect K2 value Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Unusually high tube frequency Sensor erosion Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Unusually low tube frequency Plugged flow tube Check drive gain and tube frequency.
TB Reference

be replaced.
Unusually low pickoff voltages Several possible causes See Section 6.13.5.
Unusually high drive gain Several possible causes See Section 6.13.3.

Troubleshooting
6.7.1 Damping
An incorrectly set damping value may make the transmitter’s output appear too sluggish or too jumpy.
Adjust the Flow Damping, Temperature Damping, and Density Damping parameters in the
MEASUREMENT transducer block to achieve the damping effect you want. See Section 4.12.
Other damping problems

If the transmitter appears to be applying damping values incorrectly or the damping effects do not
appear to be changed by adjustments to the damping parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer
block, then the Process Value Filter Time parameter in an AI function block may be improperly set.
Inspect each AI function block, and ensure that the Process Value Filter Time parameter is set to zero.
6.7.2 Flow cutoff

If the transmitter is sending an output of zero unexpectedly, then one of the cutoff parameters may be
set incorrectly. See Section 4.14 for more information about configuring cutoffs.
6.7.3 Output scale

An incorrectly configured output scale can cause the transmitter to report unexpected output levels.
Verify that the Transducer Scale and Output Scale values are set up correctly for each AI block. See
Section 4.9.
6.7.4 Characterization
Incorrect characterization parameters can cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values.
However, you should suspect an incorrect characterization only in specific circumstances (e.g.,
pairing the transmitter and sensor together for the first time, replacing the core processor). Refer to
Section 3.3 for more information about characterization.
6.7.5 Calibration
Improper calibration may cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values. However, you
should suspect an improper calibration only if the transmitter has been field-calibrated recently. Refer
to Section 3.2.4 for more information about calibration.
Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter
against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error. Contact Micro Motion before
calibrating your flowmeter. Refer to Section 3.5 for information about meter factors.
6.7.6 Fieldbus network power conditioner

An incorrectly set or bad power conditioner can cause inappropriate communication from the
transmitter. For the MTL power conditioner, the red switch (dual redundancy) should be set to Normal
Mode. The yellow switch (termination) should be set to Termination In. If you suspect further
problems with the power conditioner, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
6.7.7 Linearization
The linearization parameter in each AI function block can affect the transmitter’s output. Verify that
the Linearization Type parameter is set correctly. See Section 4.8.

Troubleshooting
6.8 Lost static data alarm

After performing an EEPROM init (Initialize NVM) using the Micro Motion Load Utility, the
resource block may be out of service and indicating a lost static data alarm. (This will cause all the
Operation
rest of the function blocks to also be out of service.)
This behavior is normal for an EEPROM initialization. Cycle power to the transmitter to clear the
condition.
6.9 Status alarms

Status alarms are reported by a fieldbus host, the display, and ProLink II. Remedies for the alarm
states appear in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Status alarms and remedies
Alarm
code Description Possible remedies
Troubleshooting
A001 (E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP) Cycle power to the transmitter.
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A002 RAM Error (CP) Cycle power to the transmitter.
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A003 Sensor Failure Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.
Check for slug flow. See Section 6.11.
Check sensor tubes.
A004 Temperature Sensor Failure Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
PlantWeb Alerts
Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.
Verify process temperature range is within limits for
sensor and transmitter.
Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A005 Input Overrange Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Verify process conditions.
Verify that transmitter is configured to use appropriate
measurement units. See Section 4.4.
Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Re-zero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
TB Reference
A006 Not Configured Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF
and K1 values. See Section 3.3.

Troubleshooting
Table 6-3 Status alarms and remedies (continued)
Alarm
A008 Density Overrange Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check for air in flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign
material in tubes, coating in tubes.
A009 Transmitter Initializing/warming Up Allow the transmitter to warm up. The error should
disappear from the status words once the transmitter is
ready for normal operation. If alarm does not clear, make
sure sensor is completely full or completely empty. Verify
sensor configuration and transmitter wiring to sensor
(refer to installation manual).
A010 Calibration Failure If alarm appears during zero, ensure there is no flow
through the sensor, then retry.
Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.
A011 Cal - Too Low Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.
A012 Cal - Too High Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.
A013 Cal - Too Noisy Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise,
then attempt the calibration or zero procedure again.
Possible sources of noise include:
• Mechanical pumps
• Electrical interference
• Vibration effects from nearby machinery
A014 Transmitter Failed Cycle power to the transmitter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A016 Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check wiring to sensor. Refer to installation manual.
Make sure the appropriate sensor type is configured.
See Section 3.3.1.
A017 Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
A018 (E)EPROM Checksum Error Cycle power to the transmitter.
Customer Service.
A019 RAM or ROM Test Error Cycle power to the transmitter.
Customer Service.
A020 Calibration Factors Unentered Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF
value. See Section 3.3.

Troubleshooting
Alarm
Operation
A021 Incorrect Sensor Type (K1) Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the K1
value. See Section 3.3.
A025 Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP) Cycle power to the meter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact
Micro Motion Customer Service.
A026 Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error Check wiring between transmitter and core processor
(see Section 6.10.2). The wires may be swapped. After
swapping wires, cycle power to the flowmeter.
Check for noise in wiring or transmitter environment.
Check core processor LED. See Section 6.14.2.
Perform the core processor resistance test. See
Section 6.14.3.
Troubleshooting
A028 Core Processor Write Failure Cycle power to the meter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact
Micro Motion Customer Service.
A031 Low Power The core processor is not receiving enough power.
Check the power supply to the transmitter, and check
power wiring between the transmitter and the core
processor (4-wire remote installations only).
A032 Smart Meter Verification In Progress and Allow the procedure to complete.
Outputs Fixed
If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs
set to Continue Measurement.
A033 Sensor OK / Tubes Stopped by Process No signal from LPO or RPO, suggesting that sensor
tubes are not vibrating. Verify process. Check for air in
the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes,
or coating in tubes.
A034 Smart Meter Verification Failed Rerun the test. If the test fails again, see Section 3.4.3.
PlantWeb Alerts
A035 Smart Meter Verification Aborted If desired, read the abort code. See Section 3.4.3, and
perform the appropriate action.
A102 Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube Excessive or erratic drive gain. See Section 6.13.3.
A103 Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv) Cycle power to the transmitter.
Customer Service.
A104 Calibration-in-Progress Allow the flowmeter to complete calibration.
A105 Slug Flow Allow slug flow to clear from the process.
See Section 6.11.
A106 AI/AO Simulation Active Disable simulation mode. See Section 5.3.1.
A107 Power Reset Occurred No action is necessary.
A116 API: Temperature Outside Standard Range Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
TB Reference
A117 API: Density Outside Standard Range Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A120 CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A121 CM: Extrapolation Alarm Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Troubleshooting
Alarm
A131 Smart Meter Verification In Progress Allow the procedure to complete.
If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs
set to Fault.
A132 Simulation Mode Active (sensor) Disable sensor simulation mode. See Section 5.3.2.
6.10 Diagnosing wiring problems

Use the procedures in this section to check the transmitter installation for wiring problems.
Installation procedures are provided in the manual entitled Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters:
Installation Manual.
WARNING
Removing the wiring compartment covers in explosive atmospheres while
the power is on can cause an explosion.
Before removing the field wiring compartment cover in explosive atmospheres,

shut off the power and wait five minutes.
6.10.1 Checking the power-supply wiring

To check the power-supply wiring:
1. Verify that the correct external fuse is used. An incorrect fuse can limit current to the
transmitter and keep it from initializing.
2. Power down the transmitter.
3. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.
4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals. Refer to the
5. Verify that the power-supply wires are making good contact and are not clamped to the wire
insulation.
6. Inspect the voltage label on the inside of the field-wiring compartment. Verify that the voltage
supplied to the transmitter matches the voltage specified on the label.
7. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter’s power supply terminals. Verify that it is
within specified limits. For DC power, you may need to size the cable. Refer to the installation
manual.

Troubleshooting
6.10.2 Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring

Note: This does not apply to flowmeters with an integrally mounted transmitter.
Operation
To check the sensor-to-transmitter wiring, verify that:
• The transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the wiring information provided in the
• The wires are making good contact with the terminals.
• For 4-wire connections, the mating connector between the core processor and the transmitter is
securely plugged into its socket.
If the wires are incorrectly connected:
2. Wait five minutes before opening the transmitter compartment if the transmitter is in a
hazardous area.
3. Correct the wiring.
Troubleshooting
4. Restore power to the transmitter.
6.10.3 Checking the grounding

The sensor and the transmitter must be grounded. If the core processor is installed as part of the
transmitter or the sensor, it is grounded automatically. If the core processor is installed separately, it
must be grounded separately. Refer to the installation manual.
6.10.4 Checking the communication wiring

To check the communication wiring, verify that:
• Communication wires and connections meet FOUNDATION fieldbus wiring standards.
• Wires are connected according to instructions provided in the installation manual.
PlantWeb Alerts
• Wires are making good contact with the terminals.
6.11 Checking slug flow

The dynamics of slug flow are described in Section 4.13. If the transmitter is reporting a slug flow
alarm, first check the process and possible mechanical causes for the alarm:
• Actual changes in process density
• Cavitation or flashing
• Leaks
• Sensor orientation — sensor tubes should normally be down when measuring liquids, and up
when measuring gases. Refer to the sensor documentation for more information about
orientation.
If there are no mechanical causes for the slug flow alarm, the slow flow limits and duration may be set
TB Reference
too high or too low. The high limit is set by default to 5.0 g/cm3, and the low limit is set by default to
0.0 g/cm3. Lowering the high limit or raising the low limit will cause the transmitter to be more
sensitive to changes in density. If you expect occasional slug flow in your process, you may need to
increase the slug flow duration. A longer slug flow duration will make the transmitter more tolerant of
slug flow.

Troubleshooting
6.12 Restoring a working configuration

At times it may be easier to start from a known working configuration than to troubleshoot the
existing configuration. To do this, you can:
• Restore a configuration file saved via ProLink II, if one is available. In ProLink II, choose
File > Send to Xmtr from File.
• Restore the factory configuration (ProLink II v2.6 or later required; transmitter must be
connected to an enhanced core processor). See Figure 6-1.
Neither of these methods will restore all of the transmitter’s configuration. For example, neither
method will restore the configuration of the AI, AO, and INT blocks. Using the restore factory
configuration option will also not restore such things as the configuration of the display.
Figure 6-1 Restore factory configuration
ProLink >
Configuration
Restore Factory
Configuration
6.13 Checking the test points

You can diagnose sensor failure or overrange status alarms by checking the flowmeter test points. The
test points include left and right pickoff voltages, drive gain, and tube frequency.
6.13.1 Obtaining the test points

You can obtain the test points with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

The test points are a set of clearly-named parameters in the DIAGNOSTIC transducer block:
• Left pickoff voltage
• Right pickoff voltage
• Tube frequency
• Drive Gain: Value
With ProLink II
To obtain the test points with ProLink II:
1. Choose ProLink > Diagnostic Information.
2. Write down the value you find in the Tube Frequency box, the Left Pickoff box, the Right
Pickoff box, and the Drive Gain box.

Troubleshooting
6.13.2 Evaluating the test points

Use the following guidelines to evaluate the test points:
Operation
• If the drive gain is at 100%, refer to Section 6.13.3.
• If the drive gain is unstable, refer to Section 6.13.4.
• If the value for the left or right pickoff does not equal the appropriate value from Table 6-4,
based on the sensor flow tube frequency, refer to Section 6.13.5.
• If the values for the left and right pickoffs equal the appropriate values from Table 6-4, based
on the sensor flow tube frequency, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
Table 6-4 Sensor pickoff values
Sensor model(1) Pickoff value

ELITE Model CMF sensors 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model CMF400 I.S. 2.7 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Troubleshooting
Model CMF400 with booster amplifier 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model D, DL, and DT sensors 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F025, F050, and F100 sensors 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F200 sensors (compact case) 2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F200 sensors (standard case) 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model H025, H050, and H100 sensors 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model H200 sensors 2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model R025, R050, or R100 sensor 3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model R200 sensor 2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Micro Motion T-Series sensors 0.5 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
(1) If your sensor model is not listed, contact Micro Motion Customer Support.
PlantWeb Alerts
6.13.3 Excessive drive gain
The causes and possible solutions of excessive drive gain are listed in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Excessive drive gain causes and solutions
Cause Solution
Excessive slug flow Eliminate slugs.
Change the sensor orientation.
Plugged flow tube Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.
Cavitation or flashing Increase inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
If a pump is located upstream from the sensor,
increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
Drive board or module failure, cracked Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
TB Reference
flow tube, or sensor imbalance

Mechanical binding at sensor Ensure sensor is free to vibrate.
Open drive or left pickoff sensor coil Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Flow rate out of range Ensure flow rate is within sensor limits.
Incorrect sensor characterization Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.

Troubleshooting
6.13.4 Erratic drive gain

The causes and possible solutions of erratic drive gain are listed in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Erratic drive gain causes and solutions
Cause Solution
Wrong K1 characterization constant for sensor Re-enter the K1 characterization constant. See
Section 3.3.
Polarity of pick-off reversed or polarity of Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
drive reversed
Slug flow Verify flow tubes are completely filled with process
fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly
configured. See Section 6.11.
Foreign material caught in flow tubes Purge flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.
6.13.5 Low pickoff voltage

The causes and possible solutions of low pickoff voltage are listed in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 Low pickoff voltage causes and solutions
Cause Solution
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and core Refer to the sensor manual and the transmitter
processor installation manual.
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of
the sensor
Slug flow Verify the flow tubes are completely filled with process
fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly
configured. See Section 6.11.
No tube vibration in sensor Check for plugging.
Ensure sensor is free to vibrate (no mechanical
binding).
Verify wiring.
Test coils at sensor. See Section 6.15.
Process beyond the limits of the sensor Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of
the sensor.
Moisture in the sensor electronics Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
The sensor is damaged Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Troubleshooting
6.14 Checking the core processor

Two core processor procedures are available:
Operation
• You can check the core processor LED. The core processor has an LED that indicates different
flowmeter conditions.
• You can perform the core processor resistance test to check for a damaged core processor.
For both tests you will need to expose the core processor.
6.14.1 Exposing the core processor

Follow these procedures to expose the core processor.
1. Determine your installation type. See Appendix D.
2. If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter
installation, simply remove the core processor lid. The core processor is intrinsically safe and
can be opened in all environments.
Troubleshooting
3. If you have an integral installation:
a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).
b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked
position.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws. Do not
disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
4. If you have a 9-wire remote installation:
a. Remove the end-cap.
b. Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor
mounting plate in place. Do not remove the screws. Rotate the mounting plate so that the
screws are in the unlocked position.
c. Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of
PlantWeb Alerts
the core processor is visible. Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the core
processor to the transmitter.
Figure 6-2 Integral installation components
Transmitter
Core processor
TB Reference
4 × cap screws
When reassembling components, take care not to pinch or stress the wires. Grease all O-rings.

Troubleshooting
6.14.2 Checking the core processor LED

Do not shut off power to the transmitter when checking the core processor LED. To check the core
processor LED:
1. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.
2. Check the core processor LED against the conditions listed in Table 6-8 (standard core
processor) or Table 6-9 (enhanced core processor).
Table 6-8 Standard core processor LED behavior, flowmeter conditions, and remedies
LED behavior Condition Possible remedy

1 flash per second Normal operation No action required
(75% off, 25% on)
1 flash per second Slug flow See Section 6.11.
(25% off, 75% on)
Solid on Zero or calibration in If zero or calibration procedure is in progress, no action is
progress required. If these procedures are not in progress, contact Micro
Motion Customer Service.
Core processor Check power supply to transmitter. See Section 6.10.1.
receiving between
11.5 and 5 volts
3 rapid flashes Sensor not Check wiring between transmitter and sensor (9-wire remote
followed by a pause recognized installation or remote core processor with remote transmitter
installation). Refer to the installation manual.
Improper Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.
configuration
Broken pin between Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
sensor and core
processor
4 flashes per second Fault condition Check alarm status.
OFF Core processor Verify power supply wiring to core processor. Refer to the
receiving less than installation manual.
5 volts
If status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage
across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor.
Normal reading is approximately 14 VDC. If reading is normal,
internal core processor failure is possible — contact Micro Motion
Customer Service. If reading is 0, internal transmitter failure is
possible — contact Micro Motion Customer Service. If reading is
less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor.
Wires may be switched. Refer to the installation manual.
If status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check
power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter,
display, or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion Customer
Service.
Core processor Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
internal failure
Table 6-9 Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies

Solid green Normal operation No action required.
Flashing yellow Zero in progress If calibration is in progress, no action required. If no
calibration is in progress, contact Micro Motion.
Solid yellow Low severity alarm Check alarm status.

Troubleshooting
Table 6-9 Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies (continued)
Operation
Solid red High severity alarm Check alarm status.
Flashing red (80% on, Tubes not full If alarm A105 (slug flow) is active, see Section 6.11.
20% off)
If alarm A033 (tubes not full) is active, verify process. Check
for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in
tubes, or coating in tubes.
Flashing red (50% on, Electronics failed Contact Micro Motion.
50% off)
Flashing red (50% on, Sensor failed Contact Micro Motion.
50% off, skips every
4th)
OFF Core processor • Verify power supply wiring to core processor. Refer to
receiving less than 5 Appendix D for diagrams.
volts • If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power.
Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in
Troubleshooting
core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power
supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
See Section 6.10.1. Otherwise, contact Micro Motion.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not
receiving power. Check power supply. See Section 6.10.1.
If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display,
or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion.
Core processor Contact Micro Motion.
internal failure
6.14.3 Core processor resistance test

To perform the core processor resistance test:
1. Disconnect power to the transmitter and core processor.
2. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.
PlantWeb Alerts
3. Measure the resistance across the following terminal pairs:
• The resistance across terminals 3 and 4 (RS-485A and RS-485B) should be 40–50 kohms.
• The resistance across terminals 2 and 3 (VDC– and RS-485A) should be 20–25 kohms.
• The resistance across terminals 2 and 4 (VDC– and RS-485B) should be 20–25 kohms.
If any of the resistance measurements are lower than specified, the core processor may not be able to
communicate with a transmitter or remote host. Contact Micro Motion Customer Service. TB Reference

Troubleshooting
6.15 Checking sensor coils and RTD

Problems with sensor coils can cause several alarms, including sensor failure and a variety of
out-of-range conditions. Checking the sensor coils involves testing the terminal pairs and testing for
shorts to case.
6.15.1 9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation
If you have a 9-wire remote or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation:
2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.
3. Remove the end-cap from the core processor housing.
4. Unplug the terminal blocks from the terminal board.
5. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the circuits listed in Table 6-10 by placing the
DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair.
Table 6-10 Circuit terminal pairs
Circuit Test terminal pair

Drive coil Brown to red
Left pickoff coil (LPO) Green to white
Right pickoff coil (RPO) Blue to gray
Resistance temperature detector (RTD) Yellow to violet
Lead length compensator (LLC) (All sensors except CMF400 IS and T-Series) Yellow to orange
Composite RTD (T-Series only)
Fixed resistor (CMF400 IS only)
6. There should be no open circuits (i.e., no infinite resistance readings). The LPO and RPO
readings should be the same or very close (±5 ohms). If there are any unusual readings, repeat
the coil measurement tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty
cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.
If the cable is faulty, replace the cable.
7. Leave the core processor terminal blocks disconnected. At the sensor, remove the lid of the
junction box and test each sensor terminal for a short to case by placing one DMM lead on the
terminal and the other lead on the sensor case. With the DMM set to its highest range, there
should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to
case.

Troubleshooting
8. Test the terminal pairs as follows:

• Brown against all other terminals except Red
Operation
• Red against all other terminals except Brown
• Green against all other terminals except White
• White against all other terminals except Green
• Blue against all other terminals except Gray
• Gray against all other terminals except Blue
• Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet
• Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet
• Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange
Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short
Troubleshooting
between terminals.
9. See Table 6-11 for possible causes and solutions.
10. If the problem is not resolved, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Note: When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
Table 6-11 Sensor and cable short to case possible causes and remedies
Possible cause Solution

Moisture inside the sensor junction box Make sure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is
present.
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case Contact Micro Motion.
Internally shorted feedthrough (sealed passage for Contact Micro Motion.
wiring from sensor to sensor junction box)
PlantWeb Alerts
Faulty cable Replace cable.
Improper wire termination Verify wire terminations inside sensor junction box. See the
Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and
Installation Guide or the sensor documentation.
6.15.2 4-wire remote or integral installation

If you have a 4-wire remote installation or an integral installation:
2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous environment, wait five minutes.
3. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, remove the core processor lid.
a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).
TB Reference
b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked
position.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the base.
Note: You have the option of disconnecting the 4-wire cable or leaving it connected.

Troubleshooting
5. If you have a standard core processor, loosen the captive screw (2,5 mm) at the center of the
core processor. Carefully remove the core processor from the sensor by grasping it and lifting
it straight up. Do not twist or rotate the core processor.
6. If you have an enhanced core processor, loosen the two captive screws (2,5 mm) that hold the
core processor in the housing. Gently lift the core processor out of the housing, then
disconnect the sensor cable from the feedthrough pins. Do not damage the feedthrough pins.
CAUTION
If the core processor (feedthrough) pins are bent, broken, or damaged in
any way, the core processor will not operate.
To avoid damage to the core processor (feedthrough) pins:
• Do not twist or rotate the core processor when lifting it.

• When replacing the core processor (or sensor cable) on the pins, be sure to
align the guide pins and mount the core processor (or sensor cable) carefully.
7. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to check the resistance across the right and left pickoff coils.
See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance). The resistance
values should be the same or very close (±5 ohms).
8. Use the DMM to check the resistance across the RTD and LLC (lead length compensation)
circuits. See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance).
9. Test for a ground to case by checking the resistance between each pin and the sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there
is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
If a short to case is indicated, check for moisture or corrosion. If you are unable to determine
the source of the problem, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
10. Test for shorts across terminals by testing resistance across the following terminal pairs (see
Figures 6-3 and 6-4). There should be infinite resistance in each case. If there is any resistance
at all, there is a short between the terminals.
• Brown against all other terminals except Red
• Red against all other terminals except Brown
• Green against all other terminals except White
• White against all other terminals except Green
• Blue against all other terminals except Gray
• Gray against all other terminals except Blue
• Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet
• Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet
• Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange
Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
If a short between terminals is indicated, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Troubleshooting
Figure 6-3 Sensor pins – Standard core processor

Right pickoff
(–)
Operation
Lead length compensator(1) Right pickoff
(+) (+)
Left pickoff
(–)
Resistance temperature detector return /
Lead length compensator
(common)
Left pickoff
(+)
Resistance temperature detector
Drive
(+)
(–)
Drive
(+)
Troubleshooting
(1) LLC for all sensors except T-Series and CMF400 I.S. For T-Series sensors, functions as
composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. sensors, functions as fixed resistor.
Figure 6-4 Sensor pins – Enhanced core processor
Drive – Drive +
Return for RTD, LLC,

composite RTD, or fixed
resistor
LLC / Composite RTD /
Fixed resistor(1)
PlantWeb Alerts
RTD +
Right pickoff +
Left pickoff –
Left pickoff + Right pickoff –
(1) Lead length compensator (LLC) for all sensors except T-Series, CMF400 I.S., and F300. For T-Series sensors,
functions as composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. and F300 sensors, functions as fixed resistor.
Note: The pins are shown as they appear while looking at the feedthrough on the sensor.
TB Reference

Troubleshooting
Reinstalling the core processor

If you removed the core processor, replace the core processor according to the instructions below.
1. If you have a standard core processor:
a. Align the three guide pins on the bottom of the core processor with the corresponding
holes in the base of the core processor housing.
b. Carefully mount the core processor on the pins, taking care not to bend any pins.
2. If you have an enhanced core processor:
a. Plug the sensor cable onto the feedthrough pins, being careful not to bend or damage any
pins.
b. Replace the core processor in the housing.
3. Tighten the captive screw(s) to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0,7 to 0,9 N-m) of torque.
4. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, replace the core processor lid.
a. Gently lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots. Do not
pinch or stress the wires.
b. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
c. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2,3 to 3,4 N-m).
Note: When reassembling the flowmeter components, grease all O-rings.

Appendix A
PlantWeb Alerts
Operation
A.1 PlantWeb Alerts explained
Intelligent Emerson Process Management field devices (such as the Micro Motion Model 2700 with
FOUNDATION fieldbus) possess advanced diagnostic features. PlantWeb Alerts help operators take
control of this diagnostic information by informing the operator of device issues and providing
support guidance for dealing with these issues.
PlantWeb Alerts are divided into three categories:
Troubleshooting
• Advisory – Allow maintenance to address a problem before it impacts operations. These alerts
are presented to maintenance personnel as an aid to maintenance planning.
• Maintenance – Indicate a malfunction has occurred (or is about to occur), and what the effects
might be.
• Failed – Indicate a failure has occurred which renders the device inoperative.
A.2 Setting PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-1 describes the conditions under which PlantWeb Alerts are triggered for the Micro Motion
Model 2700 with FOUNDATION fieldbus.
Table A-1 Setting PlantWeb Alerts
PlantWeb Alerts
Related
PlantWeb What the alert is Default alert parameters (and
Alert detecting category defaults) Guidelines for setting
Density out of The measured density has Failed D1, D2, K1, K2, FD, Refer to Section 3.3 for
range exceeded the sensor DTC, Tube Frequency, characterization information.
defined limits. Drive Gain, LPO,
RPO, process density
Mass flow out The measured mass flow Failed Process flow rate
of range has exceeded the sensor
defined limits.
Calibration The calibration attempted Failed Process flow rate, See Section 6.5.
failed by the user failed. process density,
process temperature
Tube not full There is no signal from the Failed Tube Frequency, Drive
left or right pickoffs. Gain, LPO, RPO,
process density
TB Reference
Slug flow Entrained gas in a liquid Maintenance Slug Low Limit (0.0), Refer to Sections 4.13 and
process or condensation in Slug High Limit (5.0), 6.11 for more information
a gas process has caused Slug Duration (1.0), about slug flow.
the density to exceed the Drive Gain, process
configured slug limits. density

PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-1 Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Related
Drive out of The drive needed to Maintenance Drive Gain, LPO,
range operate the sensors has RPO, process density
exceeded the optimal
point.
API: Process The process temperature Maintenance None
variable out of or density is outside the
range API-defined extrapolation
limits.
Sensor not The sensor is not Failed LPO, RPO, Live Zero,
responding functioning properly. Drive Gain, Tube
Frequency
Sensor Either the temperature Failed Line RTD, Meter RTD,
temperature reading from the RTD on process temperature
out of range the sensor tube or sensor
case is outside the normal
operating limits.
Transmitter not The transmitter has not Failed K1, K2, FCF Refer to Section 3.3 for
characterized had the proper flow or characterization information.
density calibration
parameters entered from
the sensor tag or flow
calibration sheet.
CM: Unable to The data entered as inputs Failed CM curve parameters Refer to Section 4.7.
fit curve data to the curve fit yield
unacceptable errors in the
fit.
Smart Meter The Smart Meter Maintenance None
Verification Verification procedure has
failed unexpectedly failed.
Smart Meter The Smart Meter Maintenance None
Verification Verification procedure was
aborted aborted by the user.
CM: The process temperature Maintenance Process density,
Extrapolation or process density is process temperature
alarm outside the user-defined
extrapolation limits.
Calibration in There is a calibration (zero, Advisory
progress density, temperature, or
Meter Verification) in
progress. If Meter
Verification is in progress,
the outputs are held at last
measured value.
PWA simulate PlantWeb Simulate Mode Advisory None
active is active.
Sensor Sensor simulate mode is Advisory None
simulate active active.
Electronics The core processor or Failed None
failure transmitter has
experienced either an
EEPROM, RAM, boot
sector or real-timer
interrupt failure.

PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-1 Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Related
Operation
Transmitter The transmitter is Failed None
initializing/ undergoing its initial
warming up startup routines.
Core There is a communication Failed None
processor/ failure between the core
transmitter processor and the
communication transmitter.
failure
ECP low The enhanced core Failed None Refer to Product Data Sheet
power processor is not receiving for transmitter power
enough power. requirements.
Possible data The core processor was Maintenance None
loss unable to successfully
Troubleshooting
store the totalizers on the
last power down.
NV writes A high number of writes Advisory All static or This condition usually exists
deferred has been detected to non-volatile because a program has been
non-volatile memory. parameters such as written that writes to function
HI_HI_LIM, block parameters not
LOW_CUT, SP, normally expected to be
TRACK_IN_D, OUT, written to on a cyclic basis.
IO_OPTS, BIAS, Any such automated write
STATUS_OPTS, sequence should be modified
SP_HI_LIM, and so to write the parameter(s) only
on. when needed.
A.3 Using PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-2 shows information required for using PlantWeb Alerts with the Micro Motion Model 2700
PlantWeb Alerts
with FOUNDATION fieldbus. Table A-3 shows the status of AI and AO block outputs under various
combinations of transducer block modes and PlantWeb Alerts.
TB Reference

PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2 Using PlantWeb Alerts
Default
PlantWeb What the Alert is alert Recommended
Alert detecting category Effect on device action/help
Density out of The measured density has Failed Density measurement • Check for partially filled
range exceeded the sensor defined unavailable. or blocked flow tubes.
limits. • Check process to ensure
density is correct.
• Verify all characterization
parameters are correct,
especially density
factors.
• Perform a density
calibration.
Mass flow out of The measured mass flow Failed Mass flow measurement • Check process to ensure
range has exceeded the sensor unavailable. mass flow is correct.
defined limits. • Verify characterization
parameters are correct.
• Zero the flowmeter.
Calibration failed The zero or density Failed Device may not be • If zeroing, verify there is
calibration attempted by the properly calibrated or no flow.
user failed. zeroed. • If performing an FD cal,
verify there is sufficient
flow.
• Cycle power to the
transmitter, then try
recalibrating the
transmitter.
• Eliminate mechanical
noise.
Tube not full There is no signal from the Failed Measurements are Check for air in the flow
left or right pickoffs. wrong or erratic. tubes, tubes not filled,
foreign material in tubes,
or coating in tubes.
Slug flow Entrained gas in a liquid Maintenance Measurements may be In a liquid process, check
process or condensation in a incorrect. If temporary or process for cavitation,
gas process has caused the expected, this can be flashing or leaks. In a gas
density to exceed the ignored. process, check
configured slug limits. temperature and pressure
to verify gas is not
condensing. If slug
condition occurred while
batching, actual product
delivered may not match
target. Monitor density and
try to resolve process
problems. If slug condition
persists, reconfigure slug
limits and/or slug timeout.
Drive out of range The drive needed to operate Maintenance Flowmeter continues to • Purge the flow tubes
the sensors has exceeded function normally, but • Increase inlet or back
the optimal point. there may be a problem. pressure at the sensor
• Change sensor
orientation
• If no other alert is active,
this condition can be
ignored.
API: Process The process temperature or Maintenance API measurements may Check the API
variable out of density is outside the be incorrect. configuration.
range API-defined extrapolation
limits.

PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2 Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Default
Operation
Sensor not The sensor is not functioning Failed Incorrect or unusable • Check sensor wiring.
responding properly. data. • Check test points.
• Purge flow tubes.
Sensor Either the temperature Failed Bad temperature • Verify characterization
temperature out reading from the RTD on the reading. This may parameters are correct.
of range sensor tube or sensor case adversely affect CM and • Check sensor wiring.
is outside the normal API variables. There may be an open or
operating limits. short lead length
compensator or an open
or short RTD in the
sensor. If open or short
is at transmitter, repair. If
open or short is at
sensor, return to Micro
Troubleshooting
Motion.
• Verify process fluid
temperature is within
sensor specifications.
Transmitter not The transmitter has not had Failed Measurements may be Check the
characterized the proper flow or density incorrect. characterization.
calibration parameters Specifically, verify the Flow
entered from the sensor tag Cal Factors, K1 and K2
or flow calibration sheet. values.
CM: Unable to fit The data entered as inputs Failed This CM curve is not Check the curve data.
curve data to the curve fit yield usable.
unacceptable errors in the fit.
Meter verification The meter verification Failed Outputs held at last Wait until meter verification
in progress routine is in progress. measured values. routine is complete.
CM: Extrapolation The process temperature or Maintenance CM variables may be Check enhanced density
alarm process density is outside incorrect or unusable. configuration data.
PlantWeb Alerts
the user-defined
extrapolation limits.
Calibration in There is a calibration (zero, Advisory If meter verification is in Allow the calibration to
progress density, temperature, or progress, the outputs complete.
meter verification) in are held at last
progress. measured values.
Otherwise, no effect.
PWA simulate PlantWeb Simulate Mode is Advisory No effect. Disable PWA Simulate
active active. Mode.
Sensor simulate Sensor simulate mode is Advisory Outputs are fixed. Disable sensor simulate
active active. mode.
Electronics The core processor or Failed Inoperable. Cycle power to the
failure transmitter has experienced transmitter. If the problem
either an EEPROM, RAM, persists, contact Micro
boot sector or real-timer Motion.
interrupt failure.
Transmitter The transmitter is Failed Temporary unavailability. Allow the transmitter to
TB Reference
initializing/ undergoing its initial startup A valid measurement warm up. The error should
warming up routines. cannot be calculated go away when the
until the startup phase is transmitter is ready for
complete. normal operation.

PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2 Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Default
Core processor/ There is a communication Failed Inoperable. Verify the wiring between
transmitter failure between the core the transmitter and the
communication processor and the core processor. Cycle
failure transmitter. power to the transmitter. If
the problem persists,
contact Micro Motion.
ECP low The enhanced core Failed Inoperable. Check the power supply to
power processor is not receiving the transmitter. Check the
enough power. wiring between the
transmitter and the core
processor.
Possible data The core processor was Maintenance Potential loss of Contact Micro Motion for a
loss unable to successfully store information. The core transmitter software
the totalizers on the last processor must rely on upgrade.
power down. the totals that were
previously saved in the
device up to 2 hours
before the power was
lost.
NV writes A high number of writes has Advisory Possibly delayed device Wait for deferred data to
deferred been detected to non-volatile configuration. To prevent be saved in NV cycle time,
memory. premature failure of the or write again in 24 hours.
memory, the write
operations have been
deferred. The deferred
data will be saved on a
daily basis or on a
non-volatile cycle time
period.
Table A-3 AI / AO block status
Transducer block
mode (Actual) Active PlantWeb Alerts AI / AO status AI / AO substatus
OOS No effect Bad Device failure
Man No effect Bad Non-specific
Auto Fail Bad Non-specific
Auto Maint., no Fail Uncertain Non-specific
Auto Advisory only Good Non-specific
Auto None Good Non-specific

Appendix B
Model 2700 Transducer Blocks Reference
Operation
B.1 Overview
The Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter has seven separate transducer blocks.
B.1.1 Transducer block names

Throughout this manual, the transducer blocks are referred to by their tag (e.g., MEASUREMENT).
Troubleshooting
Fieldbus hosts that do not support the use of tags as block names will instead show the name
TRANSDUCER followed by a numeric code. Table B-1 shows the relationship between transducer
block tag names and codes, and gives the table number where the parameters and views are described
in this appendix.
Table B-1 Transducer block tag names, code names, and table numbers
Tag name Code name Parameters Views

MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCER 400 Table B-2 Table B-3
CALIBRATION TRANSDUCER 500 Table B-4 Table B-5
DIAGNOSTICS TRANSDUCER 600 Table B-6 Table B-7
DEVICE INFORMATION TRANSDUCER 700 Table B-8 Table B-9
LOCAL DISPLAY TRANSDUCER 800 Table B-10 Table B-11
PlantWeb Alerts
API TRANSDUCER 900 Table B-12 Table B-13
CONCENTRATION TRANSDUCER 1000 Table B-14 Table B-15
MEASUREMENT
B.2 MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-2) and views (Table B-3) for the MEASUREMENT transducer
block.
Table B-2 MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
Message Data Type/ Enumerated List of

TB Reference
Parameter Mnemonic Definition Type Structure Size Values
Standard FF Parameters
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE Beginning of the VARIABLE DS_64 5 S N/A R/W N/A
transducer block
1 ST_REV The revision level of the VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R N/A
static data associated
with the function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.

Table B-2 MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
2 TAG_DESC The user description of STRING OCTET 32 S Spa R/W Any 32 Characters
the intended application STRING ces
of the block.
3 STRATEGY The strategy field can be VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W N/A
used to identify grouping
of blocks. This data is not
checked or processed by
the block.
4 ALERT_KEY The identification number VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 to 255
of the plant unit. This
information may be used
in the host for sorting
alarms, etc.
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, RECORD DS-69 4 mix Auto R/W See section 2/6 of FF-891
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
6 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects STRING BIT 2 D/20 - R See section 4.8 of FF-903
the error status STRING
associated with the
hardware or software
components associated
with a block.
7 XD_ERROR Used for all config, H/W, VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 D - R 18 = Process Error
connection failure or 19 = Configuration Error
system problems in the 20 = Electronics Failure
block. 21 = Sensor Failure
Process Variables Data
8 MFLOW Mass Flow Rate VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 0 R N/A
9 MFLOW_UNITS Standard or special mass ENUM Unsigned16 2 S g/s R/W 0000 = None
flow rate unit 1318 = g/s
1319 = g/min
1320 = g/hr
1322 = kg/s
1323 = kg/min
1324 = kg/hr
1325 = kg/day
1327 = t/min
1328 = t/h
1329 = t/d
1330 = lb/s
1331 = lb/min
1332 = lb/hr
1333 = lb/day
1335 = Ston/min
1336 = Ston/hr
1337 = Ston/day
1340 = Lton/hr
1341 = Lton/day
10 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_ Base Mass Unit ENUM Unsigned16 2 S g R/W 0000 = None
BASE 1089 = Grams
1088 = Kilograms
1092 = Metric Tons
1094 = Pounds
1096 = Short tons
11 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_ Base time unit for special ENUM Unsigned16 2 S s R/W 0000 = None
TIME mass unit 1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
12 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_ Special mass unit VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1 R/W N/A
CONV conversion factor
13 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_ Special mass flow unit STRING OCTET 8 S “NO R/W Any 8 characters
STR string STRING NE”
14 TEMPERATURE Temperature VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
15 TEMPERATURE_UNITS Temperature Unit ENUM Unsigned16 2 S C° R/W 0000 = None
1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
16 DENSITY Density VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
17 DENSITY_UNITS Density Unit ENUM Unsigned16 2 S g/cm R/W 0000 = None

3
1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
18 VOL_FLOW Volume flow rate VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
19 VOLUME_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special ENUM Unsigned16 2 S l/s R/W 0000 = None
volume flow rate unit 1347 = m3/s
1348 = m3/min
Troubleshooting
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 = ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day
20 VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE Base Volume Unit ENUM Unsigned16 2 S l R/W 0000 = None
1048 = Gallons
1038 = Liters
PlantWeb Alerts
1049 = Imperial Gallons
1043 = Cubic Feet
1034 = Cubic Meters
1051 = Barrels
21 VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME Base time unit for special ENUM Unsigned16 2 S s R/W 0000 = None
volume unit 1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
22 VOL Special volume unit VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1 R/W N/A
_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV conversion factor
23 VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_STR Special volume unit string STRING OCTET 8 S “NO R/W Any 8 characters
STRING NE”
24 MASS_TOT_INV_SPECIAL_ Special mass total and STRING OCTET 8 S “NO R/W Any 4 characters
STR inventory unit string STRING NE”
25 VOLUME_TOT_INV_ Special volume total and STRING OCTET 8 S “NO R/W Any 4 characters
SPECIAL_ STR inventory unit string STRING NE”
26 FLOW_DAMPING Flow rate (Mass and VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.8 R/W N/A
Volume) internal damping
(seconds)
TB Reference
27 TEMPERATURE_DAMPING Temperature internal VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 4.8 R/W N/A

damping (seconds)
28 DENSITY_DAMPING Density internal damping VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.6 R/W N/A
(seconds)
29 MFLOW_M_FACTOR Mass Rate Factor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.0 R/W N/A
30 DENSITY_M_FACTOR Density Factor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.0 R/W N/A
31 VOL_M_FACTOR Volume Rate Factor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.0 R/W N/A

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
32 MASS_LOW_CUT Mass flow cutoff for VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
internal totalizers
33 VOLUME_FLOW_LOW_ Volume flow cutoff for VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
CUTOFF internal totalizers
34 DENSITY_LOW_CUTOFF Density cutoff for internal VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.2 R/W N/A
totalizers
35 FLOW_DIRECTION Flow direction ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Forward Only
1 = Reverse Only
2 = Bi-Directional
3 = Absolute Value
4 = Negate/Forward Only
5 = Negate/Bi-Directional
Totalizers
36 INTEGRATOR_FB_CONFIG Configuration of ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Standard
Integrator Function Block 1 = Internal Mass Total
2 = Internal Volume Total
3 = Internal Mass Inv.
4 = Internal Volume Inv.
5 = Int Gas Vol Tot
6 = Int Gas Vol Inv
7 = Int API Vol Tot
8 = Int API Vol Inv
9 = Int CM Std Vol Tot
10= Int CM Std Vol Inv
11= Int CM Net Mass Tot
12= Int CM Net Mass Inv
13= Int CM Net Vol Tot
14= Int CM Net Vol Inv
37 START_STOP_TOTALS Start/Stop all Totalizers METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = Stop Totals
0x0001 = Start Totals
38 RESET_TOTALS Reset all Totals METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Reset
39 RESET_INVENTORIES Reset all Inventories METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Reset
40 RESET_MASS_TOTAL Reset Mass Total METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Reset
41 RESET_VOLUME_TOTAL Reset Volume Total METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Reset
42 MASS_TOTAL Mass Total VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
43 VOLUME_TOTAL Volume Total VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
44 MASS_INVENTORY Mass Inventory VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
45 VOLUME_INVENTORY Volume Inventory VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
46 MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS Standard or special mass ENUM Unsigned16 2 S g R 0000 = None
total and mass inventory 1088 = Kg
unit 1089 = g
1092 = metric tons
1094 = lbs
1095 = short tons
1096 = long tons
47 VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNITS Standard or special ENUM Unsigned16 2 S l R 0000 = None
volume total or mass 1034 = m3
inventory unit. 1036 = cm3
1038 = l
1043 = ft3
1048 = gal
1049 = ImpGal
1051 = bbl
Gas Process Variables
48 GSV_Gas_Dens Gas Density used to VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.00 R/W N/A
calculate Reference 1205
Volume Gas Flow and
Totals
49 GSV_Vol_Flow Reference Volume Gas VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Flow Rate (not valid when
API or CM is enabled)

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
50 GSV_Vol_Tot Reference Volume Gas VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A

Total (not valid when API
or CM is enabled)
51 GSV_Vol_Inv Reference Volume Gas VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Inventory (not valid when
API or CM is enabled)
52 SNS_EnableGSV Enable/Disable Gas Stan- ENUM Unsigned16 C-78 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
dard Volume Flow and (2) (OOS) 0x0001 = enabled
Totals
53 SNS_GSV_FlowUnits Gas Standard Volume ENUM Unsigned16 R-26 S SCF R/W 0000 = None
Flow Engineering Units (2) 01 M (OOS) 1360 = SCFM
1361 = SCFH
1522 = Nm3/s
Troubleshooting
1523 = Nm3/m
1524 = Nm3/h
1525 = Nm3/d
1527 = Sm3/s
1528 = Sm3/m
1529 = Sm3/h
1530 = Sm3/d
1532 = NL/s
1533 = NL/m
1534 = NL/h
1535 = NL/d
1537 = SL/s
1538 = SL/m
1539 = SL/h
1540 = SL/d
54 SNS_GSV_TotalUnits Gas Standard Volume ENUM Unsigned16 R-26 S SCF R 0000 = None
Total and Inventory Engi- (2) 02 1053 = SCF
neering Units 1521 = Nm3
1526 = Sm3
1531 = NL
PlantWeb Alerts
1536 = SL
55 SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit Base Gas Standard Vol- ENUM Unsigned16 R-26 S SCF R/W 0000 = None
ume Unit (2) 03 (OOS) 1521 = Normal cubic
meter
1531 = Normal liter
1053 = Standard cubic ft
1536 = Standard liter
1526 = Standard cu meter
56 SNS_GSVflowBaseTime Base time unit for special ENUM Unsigned16 R-26 S min R/W 0000 = None
gas standard volume unit. (2) 04 (OOS) 1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
57 SNS_GSVflowFactor Special gas standard vol- VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-26 S 1 R/W N/A
ume unit conversion fac- 05 - (OOS)
tor 2606
58 SNS_GSVflowText Special gas standard vol- STRING OCTET R-26 S “NO R/W Any 8 characters
ume unit string STRING (8) 07 - NE” (OOS)
TB Reference
2610
59 SNS_GSVtotText Special gas standard vol- STRING OCTET R-26 S “NO R/W Any 4 characters
ume total and inventory STRING (8) 11 - NE” (OOS)
unit string 2614
60 SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff Gas Standard Volume VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-46 S 0 R/W Must be >=0.0
Low Flow Cutoff 1-46 (OOS)
2

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
61 SNS_ResetGSVolTotal Reset Gas Standard Vol- Method Unsigned16 C-63 S – R/W 0x0000 = No effect
ume Total (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
62 SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv Reset Gas Standard Vol- Method Unsigned16 C-19 S – R/W 0x0000 = No Effect
ume Inventory (2) 4 (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
Other 4.0 additions
63 SNS_ResetMassInventory Reset Mass Inventory Method Unsigned16 C-19 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No effect
(2) 2 (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
64 SNS_ResetVolumeInventory Reset Volume Inventory Method Unsigned16 C-19 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No Effect
(2) 3 (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
Table B-3 MEASUREMENT transducer block views

OD
Index Parameter Mnemonic View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
Process Variables Data
8 MFLOW 5 5
9 MFLOW_UNITS 2
10 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE 2
11 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME 2
12 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV 4
13 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_STR 8
14 TEMPERATURE 5 5
15 TEMPERATURE_UNITS 2
16 DENSITY 5 5
17 DENSITY_UNITS 2
18 VOL_FLOW 5 5
19 VOL_FLOW_UNITS 2
20 VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE 2
21 VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME 2
22 VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV 4
23 VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_STR 8
24 MASS_TOT_INV_SPECIAL_ STR 8
25 VOLUME_TOT_INV_ SPECIAL_ STR 8
26 FLOW_DAMPING 4
27 TEMPERATURE_DAMPING 4
28 DENSITY_DAMPING 4

Table B-3 MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)

OD
Operation
29 MFLOW_M_FACTOR 4
30 DENSITY_M_FACTOR 4
31 VOL_M_FACTOR 4
32 MASS_LOW_CUT 4
33 VOLUME_LOW_CUT 4
34 DENSITY_LOW_CUT 4
35 FLOW_DIRECTION 2
Totalizers
36 INTEGRATOR_FB_CONFIG 2
37 START_STOP_TOTALS 2
38 RESET_TOTALS 2
39 RESET_INVENTORIES 2
Troubleshooting
40 RESET_MASS_TOTAL 2
41 RESET_VOLUME_TOTAL 2
42 MASS_TOTAL 5 5
43 VOLUME_TOTAL 5 5
44 MASS_INVENTORY 5 5
45 VOLUME_INVENTORY 5 5
46 MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS 2
47 VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNITS 2
Gas Process Variables
48 GSV_Gas_Dens 4
49 GSV_Vol_Flow 5 5
50 GSV_Vol_Tot 5 5
51 GSV_Vol_Inv 5 5
52 SNS_EnableGSV 2
PlantWeb Alerts
53 SNS_GSV_FlowUnits 2
54 SNS_GSV_TotalUnits 2
55 SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit 2
56 SNS_GSVflowBaseTime 2
57 SNS_GSVflowFactor 4
58 SNS_GSVflowText 8
59 SNS_GSVtotText 8
60 SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff 2
61 SNS_ResetGSVolTotal 2
62 SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv 2
63 SNS_ResetMassInventory 2
64 SNS_ResetVolumeInventory 2
Totals 64 76 64 85
TB Reference

B.3 CALIBRATION transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-4) and views (Table B-5) for the CALIBRATION transducer
block.
Table B-4 CALIBRATION transducer block parameters
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
transducer block
2 TAG_DESC The user description of STRING OCTET 32 S Spa R/W Any 32 Characters
the intended application STRING ces
of the block.
the block.
4 ALERT_KEY The identification VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 to 255
number of the plant unit.
This information may be
used in the host for
sorting alarms, etc.
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, RECORD DS-69 4 mix Auto R/W See section 2/6 of
permitted and normal FF-891
modes of the block.
6 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects STRING BIT 2 D/20 - R See section 4.8 of
the error status STRING FF-903
associated with the
with a block.
Calibration
8 MASS_FLOW_GAIN Flow calibration factor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.0 R/W N/A
9 MASS_FLOW_T_COMP Temperature coefficient VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 5.13 R/W N/A
for flow
10 ZERO_CAL Perform auto zero METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = Abort Zero Cal
0x0001 = Start Zero Cal
11 ZERO_TIME Maximum zeroing time VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 20 R/W N/A
12 ZERO_STD_DEV Standard deviation of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R N/A
auto zero
13 ZERO_OFFSET Present flow signal offset at VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R N/A
zero flow in μsec
14 ZERO_FAILED_VAULE Value of the zero if the VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R N/A
zero cal failed
15 LOW_DENSITY_CAL Perform low density METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
calibration 0x0001 = Start Cal
16 HIGH_DENSITY_CAL Perform high-density METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
17 FLOWING_DENSITY_CAL Perform flowing-density METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
18 D3_DENSITY_CAL Perform third point METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None

Table B-4 CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
19 D4_DENSITY_CAL Perform fourth point METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None

20 K1 Density calibration VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 100 R/W N/A
constant 1 (msec) 0
constant 2 (msec) 00
22 FD Flowing Density VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
calibration constant
constant 3 (μsec)
constant 4 (μsec)
Troubleshooting
25 D1 Density 1 (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
27 FD_VALUE Flowing Density (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
30 DENS_T_COEFF Density temperature VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 4.44 R/W N/A
coefficient
31 T_FLOW_TG_COEFF T-Series: Flow TG VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
Coefficient (FTG)
32 T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF T-Series: Flow FQ VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
Coefficient (FFQ)
33 T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF T-Series: Density TG VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
Coefficient (DTG)
34 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF1 T-Series: Density FQ VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
Coefficient #1 (DFQ1)
35 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF2 T-Series: Density FQ VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
Coefficient #2 (DFQ2)
PlantWeb Alerts
36 TEMP_LOW_CAL Perform temperature METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
calibration at the low 0x0001 = Start Cal
point (point 1)
37 TEMP_HIGH_CAL Perform temperature METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
calibration at the high 0x0001 = Start Cal
point (point 2)
38 TEMP_VALUE Temperature Value for VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W N/A
temp calibrations (in
degC)
39 TEMP_OFFSET Temperature calibration VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
offset
40 TEMP_SLOPE Temperature calibration VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 1.0 R/W N/A
slope
41 PRESSURE Pressure VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 0 R N/A
42 PRESSURE_UNITS Pressure Unit ENUM Unsigned16 2 S psi R/W 0000 = None
1148 = inch water @
68F
1156 = inch HG @ 0C
1154 = ft water @ 68F
TB Reference
1151 = mm water @ 68F

1158 = mm HG @ 0C
1141 = psi
1137 = bar
1138 = millibar
1144 = g/cm2
1145 = kg/cm2
1130 = pascals
1133 = kilopascals
1139 = torr @ 0C
1140 = atmospheres

Table B-4 CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
43 EN_PRESSURE_COMP Enable/Disable Pressure ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled

Compensation 0x0001 = enabled
44 PRESSURE_FACTOR_ Pressure correction VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
FLOW factor for flow
45 PRESSURE_FACTOR_ Pressure correction VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
DENS factor for density
46 PRESSURE_FLOW_CAL Flow calibration pressure VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
Temperature Compensation
47 SNS_EnableExtTemp Enable/Disable Method Unsigned16 C-0086 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Temperature (2) (OOS) 0x0001 = enabled
Compensation
48 SNS_ExternalTempInput External Temperature VARIABLE DS-65 (5) R-0449 S 0 R/W
-0450 (Any)
Table B-5 CALIBRATION transducer block views

OD
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
Calibration
8 MASS_FLOW_GAIN 4
9 MASS_FLOW_T_COMP 4
10 ZERO_CAL 2
11 ZERO_TIME 2
12 ZERO_STD_DEV 4
13 ZERO_OFFSET 4
14 ZERO_FAILED_VAULE 4
15 LOW_DENSITY_CAL 2
16 HIGH_DENSITY_CAL 2
17 FLOWING_DENSITY_CAL 2
18 D3_DENSITY_CAL 2
19 D4_DENSITY_CAL 2
20 K1 4
21 K2 4
22 FD 4
23 K3 4
24 K4 4
25 D1 4

Table B-5 CALIBRATION transducer block views (continued)

OD
Operation
26 D2 4
27 FD_VALUE 4
28 D3 4
29 D4 4
30 DENS_T_COEFF 4
31 T_FLOW_TG_COEFF 4
32 T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF 4
33 T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF 4
34 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF1 4
35 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF2 4
36 TEMP_LOW_CAL 2
37 TEMP_HIGH_CAL 2
Troubleshooting
38 TEMP_VALUE 4
39 TEMP_OFFSET 4
40 TEMP_SLOPE 4
41 PRESSURE 5 5
42 PRESSURE_UNITS 2
43 EN_PRESSURE_COMP 2
44 PRESSURE_FACTOR_FLOW 4
45 PRESSURE_FACTOR_DENS 4
46 PRESSURE_FLOW_CAL 4
Temperature Compensation
47 SNS_EnableExtTemp 2
48 SNS_ExternalTempInput 5
Totals 19 100 34 19
PlantWeb Alerts
B.4 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters
Following are the parameters (Table B-6) and views (Table B-7) for the DIAGNOSTICS transducer
block.
Table B-6 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access

transducer block
TB Reference

2 TAG_DESC The user description of STRING OCTET 32 S Spac R/W Any 32 Characters
the intended application STRING es
of the block.

Table B-6 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access

the block.
alarms, etc.
modes of the block.
associated with the
with a block.
Slug Flow Setup
8 SLUG_TIME Slug duration (seconds) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
9 SLUG_LOW_LIMIT Low Density limit (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0.0 R/W N/A
10 SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT High Density limit (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 5.0 R/W N/A
Alarm Status
11 ALARM1_STATUS Status Word 1 ENUM BIT 2 D/20 - R 0x0001 = Transmitter
STRING Fail
0x0002 = Sensor Fail
0x0004 = EEPROM
error (CP)
0x0008 = RAM error
(CP)
0x0010= Boot Fail (CP)
0x0020 = Unconfig –
FloCal
0x0040 = Unconfig – K1
0x0080 = Input
Overrange
0x0100 = Temp.
Overrange
0x0200 = Dens.
Overrange
0x0400 = RTI Failure
0x0800 = Cal Failed
0x1000 = Xmitter Init
0x2000 = Sns/Xmitter
comm fault
0x4000 = Other Failure
0x8000 = Not Used

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
12 ALARM2_STATUS Status Word 2 ENUM BIT 2 D/20 - R 0x0001 = Line RTD Over
STRING 0x0002 = Meter RTD
Over
0x0004 = CP Exception
0x0008 = API: Temp
OOL
0x0010 = API:Density
OOL
0x0020 = CM: Unable to
fit curve data
0x0040 = CM:
Extrapolation alarm
0x0080 = Not Used
0x0100 = EEPROM err
(2700)
0x0200 = RAM err
(2700)
0x0400 = Factory Config
Troubleshooting
err
0x0800 = Low Power
0x1000= Tube not full
0x2000 = Meter Verify
outputs set to fault
0x4000 = Not Used
0x8000 = Not Used
13 ALARM3_STATUS Status Word 3 ENUM BIT 2 D/20 - R 0x0001 = Drive
STRING Overrange
0x0002 = Slug Flow
0x0004 = Cal in
Progress
0x0008 = Data Loss
Possible
0x0010 = Upgrade
Series 2000
0x0020 = Simulation
Mode
0x0040 = Meter Verify
outputs set to LMV
0x0080 = Warming Up
0x0100 = Power Reset
0x0200 = Reverse Flow
0x0400 = Not Used
0x0800 = Not Used
PlantWeb Alerts
0x1000 = Not Used
0x2000 = Not Used
0x4000 = Not Used
0x8000 = Not Used
14 ALARM4_STATUS Status Word 4 ENUM BIT 2 D/20 - R 0x0001 = Cal Fail: Low
STRING 0x0002 = Cal Fail: High
0x0004 = Cal Fail: Noisy
0x0008 = Auto Zero IP
0x0010 = D1 IP
0x0020 = D2 IP
0x0040 = FD IP
0x0080 = Temp slope IP
0x0100 = Temp offset IP
0x0200 = D3 IP
0x0400 = D4 IP
0x0800 = Not Used
0x1000= Not Used
0x2000 = Not Used
0x4000 = Not Used
0x8000 = Not Used
15 FAULT_LIMIT Fault Limit Code ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Upscale
1 = Downscale
2 = Zero
3 = NAN
4 = Flow goes to zero
5 = None
TB Reference
16 LAST_MEASURED_VALUE Last Measured Value VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W N/A

_FAULT_TIMEOUT Fault Timeout

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
17 ALARM_INDEX Alarm Index ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = N/A

1 = EEPROM error (CP)
2 = RAM error (CP)
3 = Sensor Fail
4 = Temp. Overrange
5 = Input Overrange
6 = Uncofig – FloCal
7 = RTI Failure
8 = Dens. Overrange
9 = Xmitter Init
10 = Cal Failed
11= Cal Fail: Low
12 = Cal Fail: High
13 = Cal Fail: Noisy
14 = Transmitter Fail
15 = N/A
16 = Line RTD Over
17= Meter RTD Over
18 = EEPROM err
(2700)
19 = RAM err (2700)
20 = Unconfig – K1
21-24 =N/A
25 = Boot Fail (CP)
26 = Sns/Xmitter comm
fault
27 = N/A
28 = CP Exception
29-41 = N/A
42 = Drive Overrange
43 = Data Loss Possible
44 = Cal in Progress
45 = Slug Flow
46 = N/A
47 = Power Reset
48-51 = N/A
52 = Upgrade Series
2000
53-55= N/A
56 = API: Temp OOL
57 = API:Density OOL
58-59= N/A
60 = CM: Unable to fit
curve data
61 = CM: Extrapolation
alarm
62-70 = N/A
18 ALARM_SEVERITY Alarm Severity ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Ignore
1 = Info
2 = Fault
Diagnostics
19 DRIVE_GAIN Drive Gain VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
20 TUBE_FREQUENCY Raw Tube Period VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
21 LIVE_ZERO Live Zero (Mass Flow) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
22 LEFT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE Left Pickoff Voltage VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
23 RIGHT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE Right Pickoff Voltage VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
24 BOARD_TEMPERATURE Board Temperature VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
(degC)
25 ELECT_TEMP_MAX Maximum electronics VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature
26 ELECT_TEMP_MIN Minimum electronics VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature
27 ELECT_TEMP_AVG Average electronics VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature
28 SENSOR_TEMP_MAX Maximum sensor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature
29 SENSOR_TEMP_MIN Minimum sensor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature
30 SENSOR_TEMP_AVG Average sensor VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
temperature

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
31 RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE 9-wire cable RTD VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A

Resistance (ohms)
32 RTD_RESISTANCE_ Meter RTD Resistance VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D/20 – R N/A
METER (ohms)
33 CP_POWER_CYCLE Number of core VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 D – R N/A
processor power cycles
Meter Fingerprinting
34 MFP_SAVE_FACTORY Save Factory Cal Meter ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = no action
Fingerprint 0x0001 = save
35 MFP_RESET_STATS Reset Meter Current ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = no action
Fingerprint Statistics 0x0001 = reset
36 EN_MFP Enable/Disable Meter ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Troubleshooting
Fingerprinting 0x0001 = enabled
37 MFP_UNITS Meter Fingerprint in SI (0) ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = SI
or English (1) units 0x0001 = English
38 MFP_TV_INDEX Meter Fingerprint VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Mass Flow Rate
Transmitter Variable 1 = Temperature
Index 3 = Density
5 = Volume Flow Rate
46 = Raw Tube
Frequency
47 = Drive Gain
48 = Case Temperature
49 = LPO Amplitude
50 = RPO Amplitude
51 = Board Temperature
52 = Input Voltage
54 = Live Zero
39 MFP_TYPE Fingerprint Type ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Current
1 = Factory Cal
2 = Installation
3 = Last Zero
40 MFP_TV_INST Transmitter Variable, VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D – R
Instantaneous (only valid
for Current print)
PlantWeb Alerts
41 MFP_TV_AVG Transmitter Variable, VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D – R
Average (1-min rolling)
42 MFP_TV_STD_DEV Transmitter Variable, Std VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D – R
Dev (1-min rolling)
43 MFP_TV_MAX Transmitter Variable, VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D – R
Maximum (since last
statistics reset)
44 MFP_TV_MIN Transmitter Variable, VARIABLE FLOAT 4 D – R
Minimum (since last
statistics reset)
v4.0 Additions
45 DIAG_FEATURE_KEY Enabled Features STRING BIT R-500 S – R 0x0000 = standard
STRING (2) 0 0x0010 = Meter Verify.
0x0080 = PID
0x0800 = Enh. Density
0x1000 = API
46 SYS_PowerOnTimeSec Power on time (Seconds VARIABLE R-262 D – R N/A
since last reset) UnsignedI3 5-262
2 (4) 6
TB Reference
47 SNS_InputVoltage Input Voltage (Volts) VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-385 D – R N/A

-386
48 SNS_TargetAmplitude Actual Target Amplitude VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-395 D – R N/A
(mV/Hz) (Pre 700 2.1, -396
Actual & Override)
49 SNS_CaseRTDRes Case RTD Resistance VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-473 D – R N/A
(ohms) -474

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
50 SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig Restore Factory Method Unsigned16 C-024 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = no action

Configuration (2) 7 (OO 0x0001 = Restore
S)
51 SNS_FlowZeroRestore Restore Factory Zero Method Unsigned16 C-243 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = no action
(2) (OO 0x0001 = Restore
S)
52 SNS_AutoZeroFactory Factory flow signal offset VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
at zero flow (units of 2673-
μSec) 2674
53 SYS_ResetPowerOnTime Reset power-on time Method Unsigned16 C-242 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = no action
(2) (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
54 FRF_EnableFCFValidation Start/Stop Meter Method Unsigned16 R-300 S 0 R/W 0 = Disabled
Verification (2) 0 (OO 1 = Full Meter
S) Verification (including
current calibrations)
2 =Factory Air
Verification
3 =Factory Water
Verification
4 =Special debug mode
5 =Abort
6 =Background Meter
Verification (no current
cal)
7 = Single Point Baseline
(takes the place of
factory air and factory
water)
55 FRF_FaultAlarm The state of the outputs ENUM Unsigned16 R-309 S 0 R/W 0=Last Value
when the meter (2) 3 (Any) 1=Fault
verification routine is
running.
56 FRF_StiffnessLimit The setpoint of the VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S 0 R/W
stiffness limit. 3147- (Any)
Represents percentage. 3148
57 FRF_AlgoState The current state of the VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-300 S – R 1 through 18
meter verification routine. (2) 1
58 FRF_AbortCode The reason the meter ENUM Unsigned16 R-300 S – R 0=No error
verification routine (2) 2 1=Manual Abort
aborted. 2=Watchdog Timeout
3=Frequency Drift
4=High Peak Drive
Voltage
5=High Drive Current
Standard Deviation
6=High Drive Current
Mean Value
7=Drive loop reported
error
8=High Delta T Standard
Deviation
9=High Delta T Value
10=State Running
59 FRF_StateAtAbort The state of the meter VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-300 S – R 1 through 18
verification routine when (2) 3
it aborted.
60 FRF_Progress Progress (% Complete) VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-302 S – R N/A
(2) 0
61 FRF_StiffOutLimLpo Is the LPO Stiffness out VARIABLE Unsigned16 R- S – R N/A
of limits? (2) 3004
62 FRF_StiffOutLimRpo Is the RPO Stiffness out VARIABLE Unsigned16 R- S – R N/A
of limits? (2) 3005

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
63 FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean The current LPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A

calculated as a mean 3101
–
3102
with
3100=
0
64 FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean The current RPO VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
stiffness calculated as a 3103-
mean 3104
with
3100=
0
65 FRF_Damping_mean The current damping VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
Troubleshooting
calculated as a mean 3105-
3106
with
3100=
0
66 FRF_MassLpo_mean The current LPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
3108
with
3100=
0
67 FRF_MassRpo_mean The current RPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
3110
with
3100=
0
68 FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev The current LPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
calculated as a standard 3101
deviation –
3102
PlantWeb Alerts
with
3100=
1
69 FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev The current RPO VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
stiffness calculated as a 3103-
standard deviation 3104
with
3100=
1
70 FRF_Damping_stddev The current damping VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
calculated as a standard 3105-
deviation 3106
with
3100=
1
71 FRF_MassLpo_stddev The current LPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
deviation 3108
with
3100=
1
TB Reference
72 FRF_MassRpo_stddev The current RPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A

deviation 3110
with
3100=
1

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
73 FRF_StiffnessLpo_air The LPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A

during Factory Cal of Air –
3102
with
3100=
2
74 FRF_StiffnessRpo_air The RPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
during Factory Cal of Air 3104
with
3100=
2
75 FRF_Damping_air The damping calculated VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
as a mean during Factory 3105-
Cal of Air 3106
with
3100=
2
76 FRF_MassLpo_air The LPO mass calculated VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
Cal of Air 3108
with
3100=
2
77 FRF_MassRpo_air The RPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
during Factory Cal of Air 3110
with
3100=
2
78 FRF_StiffnessLpo_water The LPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
during Factory Cal of –
Water 3102
with
3100=
3
79 FRF_StiffnessRpo_water The RPO stiffness VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
during Factory Cal of 3104
Water with
3100=
3
80 FRF_Damping_water The damping calculated VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
Cal of Water 3106
with
3100=
3
81 FRF_MassLpo_water The LPO mass calculated VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
Cal of Water 3108
with
3100=
3
82 FRF_MassRpo_water The RPO mass VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R– S – R N/A
during Factory Cal of 3110
Water with
3100=
3
83 ALERT_TIMEOUT Alert Timeout VARIABLE Unsigned16 R- S 0 R/W 0 to 300 sec
(2) 1512 (Any)

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
84 FRF_FCFValidCounter Counts the number of VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-301 S 0 R N./A

times the Meter (2) 7
Verification algorithm has
run successfully.
85 FRF_StartMeterVer Start On-Line Meter Method Unsigned16 Coil S 0 RW 0x0000 = no action
Verification (Equivalent to (2) 190 (Any) 0x0001 = Start
Reg 3000=6)
86 FRF_MV_Index FCF Datalog Index (0-19, VARIABLE Unsigned16 2984 S 0 RW N/A
0 = most recent run) (2) (Any)
87 FRF_MV_Counter FCF Datalog Item 1: Run VARIABLE Unsigned16 2985 S - R N/A
Number (2)
88 FRF_MV_Status FCF Datalog Item 2: VARIABLE Unsigned16 2986 S - R N/A
Status (Bit7 = FCF (2)
Troubleshooting
pass/fail, Bits6-4 = state,
Bits3-0 = Abort code)
Abort States are
compressed to fit in 3 bits
89 FRF_MV_Time FCF Datalog Item 3: VARIABLE Unsigned32 2987- S - R N/A
Time Initiated (4) 2988
90 FRF_MV_LPO_Norm FCF Datalog Item 4: LPO VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 2989- S - R N/A
Normalized Data 2990
91 FRF_MV_RPO_Norm FCF Datalog Item 5: RPO VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 2991- S - R N/A
Normalized Data 2992
92 FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time FCF Timers: Time Until VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 2993- S - RW N/A
First Run in Hours 2994 (Any)
93 FRF_MV_Elapse_Time FCF Timers: Time VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 2995- S - RW N/A
between each run after 2996 (Any)
the first run initiated in
hours
PlantWeb Alerts
94 FRF_MV_Time_Left FCF Timers: Time Until VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 2997- S - R N/A
Next Run in Hours 2998
95 FRF_ToneLevel Frf Tone Level (mA) VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3083- S - RW N/A
3084 (OO
S)
96 FRF_ToneRampTime Tone Ramp Time VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3085- S - RW N/A
(Seconds) 3086 (OO
S)
97 FRF_BlCoeff BL Coef. VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3087- S - RW N/A
3088 (OO
S)
98 FRF_DriveTarget FRF Drive Target VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3089- S - RW N/A
3090 (OO
S)
99 FRF_DrivePCoeff FRF Drive P Coefficient VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3091- S - RW N/A
3092 (OO
S)
100 FRF_DriveCurr Drive Current VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3113- S - R N/A
3114
TB Reference
101 FRF_DL_T Delta T VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3115- S - R N/A

3116
102 FRF_Temp Temperature VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3117- S - R N/A
3118
103 FRF_Density Density VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3119- S - R N/A
3120
104 FRF_DriveFreq Drive Frequency VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3121- S - R N/A
3122

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
105 FRF_LpoFilt LPO Filter VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3123- S - R N/A

3124
106 FRF_RpoFilt RPO Filter VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3125- S - R N/A
3126
107 FRF_ToneSpacingMult Tone Spacing Multiplier VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3159- S - RW N/A
3160 (OO
S)
108 FRF_Freq_DriftLimit Frequency Drift Limit VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3161- S - RW N/A
3162 (OO
S)
109 FRF_Max_Current_mA Max Sensor Current VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3163- S - RW N/A
3164 (OO
S)
110 FRF_KFQ2 KFQ2 Linear Density VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3165- S - RW N/A
Correction for Stiffness 3166 (OO
Value S)
111 FRF_DataSetSelIndex FCF Verification Data Set VARIABLE Unsigned16 3100 S 0 RW 0=Current Data Means
Selection (2) (Any) 1=Current Data Std
Deviations
2=Factory Cal of Air
Means
3=Factory Cal of Water
Means
4=Running average data
5=Standard Error of the
Estimate
Table B-7 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views

OD
Index Parameter Mnemonic View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4 View 4_1 View 4_2
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
Slug Flow Setup
8 SLUG_TIME 4
9 SLUG_LOW_LIMIT 4
10 SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT 4
Alarm Status
11 ALARM1_STATUS 2 2
15 FAULT_LIMIT_CODE 2
16 LAST_MEASURED_VALUE_FAULT_TIMEOUT 2
17 ALARM_INDEX 2

Table B-7 DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)

OD
Operation
18 ALARM_SEVERITY 2
Diagnostics
19 DRIVE_GAIN 5 5
20 TUBE_FREQUENCY 4
21 LIVE_ZERO 4
22 LEFT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE 4
23 RIGHT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE 4
24 BOARD_TEMPERATURE 4
25 ELECT_TEMP_MAX 4
26 ELECT_TEMP_MIN 4
27 ELECT_TEMP_AVG 4
28 SENSOR_TEMP_MAX 4
Troubleshooting
29 SENSOR_TEMP_MIN 4
30 SENSOR_TEMP_AVG 4
31 RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE 4
32 RTD_RESISTANCE_METER 4
33 CP_POWER_CYCLE 2
Meter Fingerprinting
34 MFP_SAVE_FACTORY 2
35 MFP_RESET_STATS 2
36 EN_MFP 2
37 MFP_UNITS 2
38 MFP_TV_INDEX 2
39 MFP_TYPE 2
40 MFP_TV_INST 4
41 MFP_TV_AVG 4
PlantWeb Alerts
42 MFP_TV_STD_DEV 4
43 MFP_TV_MAX 4
44 MFP_TV_MIN 4
v4.0 Additions
45 DIAG_FEATURE_KEY 2
46 SYS_PowerOnTimeSec 4
47 SNS_InputVoltage 4
48 SNS_TargetAmplitude 4
49 SNS_CaseRTDRes 4
50 SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig 2
51 SNS_FlowZeroRestore 2
52 SNS_AutoZeroFactory 4
53 SYS_ResetPowerOnTime 2
54 FRF_EnableFCFValidation 2
TB Reference
55 FRF_FaultAlarm 2
56 FRF_StiffnessLimit 4
57 FRF_AlgoState 2
58 FRF_AbortCode 2
59 FRF_StateAtAbort 2
60 FRF_Progress 2
61 FRF_StiffOutLimLpo 2


OD
62 FRF_StiffOutLimRpo 2
63 FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean 4
64 FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean 4
65 FRF_Damping_mean 4
66 FRF_MassLpo_mean 4
67 FRF_MassRpo_mean 4
68 FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev 4
69 FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev 4
70 FRF_Damping_stddev 4
71 FRF_MassLpo_stddev 4
72 FRF_MassRpo_stddev 4
73 FRF_StiffnessLpo_air 4
74 FRF_StiffnessRpo_air 4
75 FRF_Damping_air 4
76 FRF_MassLpo_air 4
77 FRF_MassRpo_air 4
78 FRF_StiffnessLpo_water 4
79 FRF_StiffnessRpo_water 4
80 FRF_Damping_water 4
81 FRF_MassLpo_water 4
82 FRF_MassRpo_water 4
83 ALERT_TIMEOUT 2
84 FRF_FCFValidCounter 2
85 FRF_StartMeterVer 2
86 FRF_MV_Index 2
87 FRF_MV_Counter 2
88 FRF_MV_Status 2
89 FRF_MV_Time 4
90 FRF_MV_LPO_Norm 4
91 FRF_MV_RPO_Norm 4
92 FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time 4
93 FRF_MV_Elapse_Time 4
94 FRF_MV_Time_Left 4
95 FRF_ToneLevel 4
96 FRF_ToneRampTime 4
97 FRF_BlCoeff 4
98 FRF_DriveTarget 4
99 FRF_DrivePCoeff 4
100 FRF_DriveCurr 4
101 FRF_DL_T 4
102 FRF_Temp 4
103 FRF_Density 4
104 FRF_DriveFreq 4
105 FRF_LpoFilt 4


OD
Operation
106 FRF_RpoFilt 4
107 FRF_ToneSpacingMult 4
108 FRF_Freq_DriftLimit 4
109 FRF_Max_Current_mA 4
110 FRF_KFQ2 4
111 FRF_DataSetSelIndex 2
Totals 22 22 112 39 96 102
B.5 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-8) and views (Table B-9) for the DEVICE INFORMATION
transducer block.
Troubleshooting
Table B-8 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
transducer block
PlantWeb Alerts
of the block.
the block.
alarms, etc.
modes of the block.
associated with the
with a block.
TB Reference

Transmitter Data
8 SERIAL_NUMBER Serial number of this VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 0 R ≥0
device
9 OPTION_BOARD_CODE Code of the Output ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 2 R 0 = None
Option Board 1 = Analog I/0
2 = Foundation Fieldbus

Table B-8 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
10 700_SW_REV Model 700 Transmitter VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S S/W R N/A

software revision Rev
11 2700_SW_REV Model 2700 Transmitter VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S S/W R N/A
software revision Rev
12 CEQ_NUMBER Model 2700 Transmitter VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S S/W R N/A
CEQ Number Rev
13 DESCRIPTION User Text STRING OCTET 16 S “” R/W
STRING
Sensor Data
14 SENSOR_SN Sensor serial number VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 0 R ≥0
15 SENSOR_TYPE Sensor type (i.e. F200, STRING OCTET 16 S “CON R
CMF025) STRING FIGU
RE
XMT
R”
16 SENSOR_TYPE_CODE Sensor type code ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Curve Tube
1 = Straight Tube
17 SENSOR_MATERIAL Sensor Material ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 253 R/W 0 = None
3 = Hastelloy C-22
4 = Model
5 = Tantalum
6 = Titanium
19 = 316L stainless steel

23 = Inconel
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
18 SENSOR_LINER Liner Material ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 253 R/W 0 = None
10 = PTFE (Teflon
11 = Halar
16 = Tefzel
251 = None
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
19 SENSOR_END Flange Type ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 253 R/W 0 = ANSI 150
1 = ANSI 300
2 = ANSI 600
5 = PN 40
7 = JIS 10K
8 = JIS 20K
9 = ANSI 900
10 = Sanitary Clamp
Fitting
11 = Union
12 = PN 100
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
20 HIGH_MASS_LIMIT High mass flow limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
21 HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT High Temperature limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
22 HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT High density limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor (g/cc)
23 HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT High volume flow limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
24 LOW_MASS_LIMIT Low mass flow limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
25 LOW_TEMP_LIMIT Low Temperature limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
26 LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT Low density limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor (g/cc)
27 LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT Low volume flow limit of VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
sensor
28 MASS_MIN_RANGE Mass flow minimum VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
range

Table B-8 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
29 TEMP_MIN_RANGE Temperature minimum VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A

range
30 DENSITY_MIN_RANGE Density minimum range VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
(g/cc)
31 VOLUME_MIN_RANGE Volume flow minimum VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S Calc R/W N/A
range
32 SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode Device Type for the ENUM Unsigned16 R-116 S – R 40 = 700 (CP)
attached Core Processor (2) 2 50 = 800 (ECP)
33 AI_SIMULATE_MODE AI Simulate Mode ENUM Unsigned16 C-84 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
(2) (Any) 0x0001 = enabled
34 SNS_HartDeviceID Core Processor Unique VARIABLE Unsigned32 R-118 S 0 R N/A
ID (2) 7-118
8
Troubleshooting
35 SYS_DeviceType Transmitter Device Type VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-120 S 43 R N/A
(2)
Table B-9 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views

OD
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
PlantWeb Alerts
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
Transmitter Data
8 SERIAL_NUMBER 4
9 OPTION_BOARD_CODE 2
10 700_SW_REV 2
11 2700_SW_REV 2
12 CEQ_NUMBER 2
13 DESCRIPTION 16
Sensor Data
14 SENSOR_SN 4
15 SENSOR_TYPE 16
16 SENSOR_TYPE_CODE 2
17 SENSOR_MATERIAL 2
TB Reference
18 SENSOR_LINER 2
19 SENSOR_END 2
20 HIGH_MASS_LIMIT 4
21 HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT 4
22 HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT 4
23 HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT 4

Table B-9 DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views (continued)

OD
24 LOW_MASS_LIMIT 4
25 LOW_TEMP_LIMIT 4
26 LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT 4
27 LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT 4
28 MASS_MIN_RANGE 4
29 TEMP_MIN_RANGE 4
30 DENSITY_MIN_RANGE 4
31 VOLUME_MIN_RANGE 4
32 SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode 2
33 AI_SIMULATE_MODE 2
34 SNS_HartDeviceID 4
35 SYS_DeviceType 2
Totals 9 48 9 73
B.6 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-10) and views (Table B-11) for the LOCAL DISPLAY
transducer block.
Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
Message Data Type/ Access Enumerated List of

transducer block
of the block.
3 STRATEGY The strategy field can VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W N/A
be used to identify
grouping of blocks. This
data is not checked or
processed by the block.
modes of the block.
associated with the
with a block.
connection failure of 19 = Configuration Error

Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
Access
LDO
8 EN_LDO_TOT_RESET Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Totalizer Reset 0x0001 = enabled
9 EN_LDO_TOT_START_STO Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
P Totalizer Start/Stop 0x0001 = enabled
option
10 EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Auto Scroll Feature 0x0001 = enabled
11 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Offline Menu Feature 0x0001 = enabled
12 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Offline Password 0x0001 = enabled
Troubleshooting
13 EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Alarm Menu 0x0001 = enabled
14 EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARM Enable/Disable LDO ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
S Acknowledge All alarms 0x0001 = enabled
feature
15 LDO_OFFLINE_PWD LDO offline password VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 1234 R/W 0 - 9999
16 LDO_SCROLL_RATE LDO Scroll rate VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 10 R/W -
17 LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON LDO Backlight Control ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = off
0x0001 = on
18 UI_Language Display language ENUM Unsigned16 R-1359 S 0 R/W 0 = English
selection (2) (Any) 1 = German
2 = French
3 = Reserved
4 = Spanish
19 LDO_VAR_1_CODE Display the Variable ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W Same as
associated with the (Any) LDO_VAR_2_CODE
code on the LDO
PlantWeb Alerts
TB Reference

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
Access
20 LDO_VAR_2_CODE Display the Variable ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 2 R/W 0 = Mass Flow Rate
associated with the 1 = Temperature
code on the LDO 2 = Mass Total
3 = Density
4 = Mass Inventory
5 = Volume Flow Rate
6 = Volume Total
7 = Volume Inventory
15 = API: Corr Density
16 = API: Corr Vol Flow
17 = API: Corr Vol Total
18 = API: Corr Vol Inv
19 = API: Avg Density
20 = API: Avg Temp
21 = CM: Density At Ref
22 = CM: Density (SGU)
23 = CM: Std Vol Flow
Rate
24 = CM: Std Vol Total
25 = CM: Std Vol
Inventory
26 = CM: Net Mass Flow
27 = CM: Net Mass Total
28 = CM: Net Mass Inv
29 = CM: Net Vol Flow
Rate
30 = CM: Net Vol Total
31 = CM: Net Vol
Inventory
32 = CM: Concentration
33 = API: CTL
46 = Raw Tube
Frequency
47 = Drive Gain
48 = Case Temperature
49 = LPO Amplitude
50 = RPO Amplitude
51 = Board Temperature
52 = Input Voltage
53 = Ext. Input Pressure
54 = Live Zero
55 = Ext. Input Temp
56 = CM: Density
(Baume)
62 = Gas Std Vol Flow
63 = Gas Std Vol Total
64 = Gas Std Vol
Inventory
69 = Live Zero
251 = None
associated with the LDO_VAR_2_CODE
code on the LDO
code on the LDO
code on the LDO
code on the LDO
code on the LDO
code on the LDO
code on the LDO

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
Access

code on the LDO
34 FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex Process Variable Code ENUM Unsigned16 N/A S 0 R/W Same as
(2) (Any) LDO_VAR_2_CODE
35 UI_NumDecimals The number of digits VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-1368 S 4 R/W 0 to 5
displayed to the right of (2) with (Any)
the decimal point for the R-1367
Troubleshooting
process variable
selected with index 34
36 UI_UpdatePeriodmsec The period in VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-2621 S 200 R/W 100 to 10000
milliseconds in which (2) (Any)
the display is updated
37 UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking Enable/Disable Display ENUM Unsigned16 C-235 S 1 R/W 0 = Disable
Status LED Blinking (2) (Any) 1 = Enable
38 UI_EnableAlarmPassword Enable/Disable Display ENUM Unsigned16 C-236 S 0 R/W 0 = Disable
Alarm Screen Password (2) (Any) 1 = Enable
Table B-11 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views

OD
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
PlantWeb Alerts
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
LDO
8 EN_LDO_TOT_RESET 2
9 EN_LDO_TOT_START_STOP 2
10 EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL 2
11 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU 2
12 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD 2
13 EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU 2
TB Reference
14 EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARMS 2
15 LDO_OFFLINE_PWD 2
16 LDO_SCROLL_RATE 2
17 LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON 2
18 UI_Language 2
19 LDO_VAR_1_CODE 2

Table B-11 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views (continued)

OD
20 LDO_VAR_2_CODE 2
21 LDO_VAR_3_CODE 2
22 LDO_VAR_4_CODE 2
23 LDO_VAR_5_CODE 2
24 LDO_VAR_6_CODE 2
25 LDO_VAR_7_CODE 2
26 LDO_VAR_8_CODE 2
27 LDO_VAR_9_CODE 2
28 LDO_VAR_10_CODE 2
34 FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex 2
35 UI_NumDecimals 2
36 UI_UpdatePeriodmsec 2
37 UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking 2
38 UI_EnableAlarmPassword 2
Totals 9 4 9 65
B.7 API transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-12) and views (Table B-13) for the API transducer block.
Table B-12 API transducer block parameters

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access

transducer block
the intended STRING es
application of the block.
3 STRATEGY The strategy field can VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W N/A
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.

Table B-12 API transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
modes of the block.
associated with the
components
associated with a
block.
7 XD_ERROR Used for all config, VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 D - R 18 = Process Error
H/W, connection failure 19 = Configuration Error
or system problems in 20 = Electronics Failure
the block. 21 = Sensor Failure
API Process Variables
Troubleshooting
8 API_Corr_Density Temp Corrected VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Density
9 API_Corr_Vol_Flow Temp Corrected VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
(Standard) Volume
Flow
10 API_Ave_Corr_Density Batch Weighted VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Average Density
11 API_Ave_Corr_Temp Batch Weighted VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Average Temperature
12 API_CTL CTL VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
13 API_Corr_Vol_Total Temp Corrected VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
(Standard) Volume
Total
14 API_Corr_Vol_Inv Temp Corrected VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
(Standard) Volume
Inventory
15 API_Reset_Vol_Total Reset API Reference METHOD Unsigned16 2 - – N/A 0x0000 = None
Volume Total 0x0001 = Reset
PlantWeb Alerts
API Setup Data
16 EN_API Enable/Disable API ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
17 API_Ref_Temp API Reference Temp VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
18 API_TEC API Thermal VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Expansion Coeff
19 API_Table_Type API 2540 CTL Table ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 17 = Table 5A
Type 18 = Table 5B
19 = Table 5D
36 = Table 6C
49 = Table 23A
50 = Table 23B
51 = Table 23D
68 = Table 24C
81 = Table 53A
82 = Table 53B
83 = Table 53D
100 = Table 54C
20 API_FEATURE_KEY Enabled Features STRING BIT 2 S - R 0x0000 = standard
STRING 0x0010 = Meter Verify.
0x0080 = PID
0x1000 = API
TB Reference
21 SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv Reset API/GSV Method Unsigned16 C-0194 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No Effect

Inventory (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Reset

Table B-12 API transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
22 API_TEMPERATURE_UNITS Temperature Unit ENUM Unsigned16 R-0041 S C° R 0000 = None

(2) 1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
23 API_DENSITY_UNITS Density Unit ENUM Unsigned16 R-0040 S g/cm3 R 0000 = None
(2) 1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
24 API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special ENUM Unsigned16 R- S l/s R 0000 = None
volume flow rate unit (2) 0042 1347 = m3/s
1348 = m 3/min
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 = ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day
Table B-13 API transducer block views

OD
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
API Process Variables
8 API_Corr_Density 5 5
9 API_Corr_Vol_Flow 5 5

Table B-13 API transducer block views (continued)

OD
Operation
10 API_Ave_Corr_Density 5 5
11 API_Ave_Corr_Temp 5 5
12 API_CTL 5 5
13 API_Corr_Vol_Total 5 5
14 API_Corr_Vol_Inv 5 5
15 API_Reset_Vol_Total 2
API Setup Data
16 EN_API 2
17 API_Ref_Temp 4
18 API_TEC 4
19 API_Table_Type 2
20 API_FEATURE_KEY 2
Troubleshooting
21 SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv 2
22 API_TEMPERATURE_UNITS 2
23 API_DENSITY_UNITS 2
24 API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS 2
Totals 44 12 44 19
B.8 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-14) and views (Table B-15) for the CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT transducer block.
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
PlantWeb Alerts
OD Index
Access

transducer block
of the block.
of blocks. This data is
not checked or
processed by the block.
TB Reference

modes of the block.

Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
associated with the
with a block.
CM Process Variables
8 CM_Ref_Dens Density At Reference VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
9 CM_Spec_Grav Density (Fixed SG Units) VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
10 CM_Std_Vol_Flow Standard Volume Flow VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Rate
11 CM_Net_Mass_Flow Net Mass Flow Rate VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
12 CM_Net_Vol_Flow Net Volume Flow Rate VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
13 CM_Conc Concentration VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
14 CM_Baume Density (Fixed Baume VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Units)
CM Totals
15 CM_Std_Vol_Total Standard Volume Total VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
16 CM_Std_Vol_Inv Standard Volume VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
Inventory
17 CM_Net_Mass_Total Net Mass Total VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
18 CM_Net_Mass_Inv Net Mass Inventory VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
19 CM_Net_Vol_Total Net Volume Total VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
20 CM_Net_Vol_Inv Net Volume Inventory VARIABLE DS-65 5 D/20 – R N/A
21 CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total Reset CM Standard METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
Volume Total 0x0001 = Reset
22 CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Total Reset CM Net Mass METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
Total 0x0001 = Reset
23 CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total Reset CM Net Volume METHOD Unsigned16 2 - 0 N/A 0x0000 = None
Total 0x0001 = Reset
CM Setup Data
24 EN_CM Enable/Disable ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = disabled
Concentration 0x0001 = enabled
Measurement
25 CM_Curve_Lock Lock Concentration ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = not locked
Measurement Tables 0x0001 = locked
26 CM_Mode Concentration ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 = None
Measurement Mode 1 = Dens @ Ref Temp
2 = Specific Gravity
3 = Mass Conc (Dens)
4 =Mass Conc (SG)
5 = Volume Conc (Dens)
6 = Volume Conc (SG)
7 = Concentration (Dens)
8 = Concentration (SG)
27 CM_Active_Curve Active Calculation Curve VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 through 5
28 CM_Curve_Index Curve Configuration VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 through 4
Index (n)
29 CM_Temp_Index Curven Temperature VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 through 5
Isotherm Index (x-axis)
30 CM_Conc_Index Curven Concentration VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 0 through 5
Index (y-axis)

Store/Rate (HZ)
Operation
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
31 CM_Temp_ISO Curven (6x5) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W

Temperature Isothermx
Value (x-axis)
32 CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO Curven (6x5) Density @ VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Temperature IsothermX,
ConcentrationY
33 CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff Curven (6x5) Coeff @ VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Temperature IsothermX,
ConcentrationY
34 CM_Conc_Label_55 Curven (6x5) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
ConcentrationY Value
(Label for y-axis)
35 CM_Dens_At_Conc Curven (5x1) Density at VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
ConcentrationY (at Ref
Troubleshooting
Temp)
36 CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff Curven (5x1) Coeff at VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
ConcentrationY (at Ref
Temp)
37 CM_Conc_Label_51 Curven (5x1) VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
ConcentrationY Value
(y-axis)
38 CM_Ref_Temp Curven Reference VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Temperature
39 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp Curven SG Water VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Reference Temperature
40 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens Curven SG Water VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Reference Density
41 CM_Slope_Trim Curven Slope Trim VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
42 CM_Slope_Offset Curven Offset Trim VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
43 CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit Curven Extrapolation VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R/W
Alarm Limit: %
44 CM_Curve_Name Curven ASCII String – VARIABLE OCTET 12 S ““ R/W
PlantWeb Alerts
Name of Curve – 12 STRING
chars supported
45 CM_Max_Fit_Order Maximum Fit Order for VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 2, 3, 4, 5
5x5 curve
46 CM_Fit_Results Curven Curve Fit Results ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R 0 = Good
1 = Poor
2 = Failed
3 = Empty
47 CM_Conc_Unit_Code Curven Concentration ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W 1110 = Degrees Twaddell
Units Code 1426 = Degrees Brix
1111 = Deg Baume
(heavy)
1112 = Deg Baume (light)
1343 = % sol/wt
1344 = % sol/vol
1427 = Degrees Balling
1428 = Proof Per Volume
1429 = Proof Per mass
1346 = Percent Plato
48 CM_Expected_Acc Curven Curve Fit VARIABLE FLOAT 4 S 0 R
Expected Accuracy
49 CM_FEATURE_KEY Enabled Features STRING BIT 2 S - R 0x0000 = standard
STRING 0x0010 = Meter Verify.
TB Reference
0x0080 = PID
0x1000 = API
v4.0 Additions
50 SNS_ResetCMVolInv Reset CM Volume Method Unsigned16 C-019 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No Effect
Inventory (2) 5 (Any) 0x0001 = Reset
51 SNS_ResetCMNetMassInv Reset CM Net Mass Method Unsigned16 C-019 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No Effect

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Access
52 SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv Reset CM Net Volume Method Unsigned16 C-019 S 0 R/W 0x0000 = No Effect
53 SNS_CM_ResetFlag Reset All Concentration Method Unsigned16 C-249 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = Not used
Measurement Curve (2) (OOS) 0x0001 = Reset
Information
54 SNS_CM_EnableDensLow Enable Low Density ENUM Unsigned16 C-250 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = Disable
Extrap Extrapolation Alarm (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Enable
55 SNS_CM_EnableDensHigh Enable High Density ENUM Unsigned16 C-251 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = Disable
Extrap Extrapolation Alarm (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Enable
56 SNS_CM_EnableTempLow Enable Low ENUM Unsigned16 C-252 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = Disable
Extrap Temperature (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Enable
Extrapolation Alarm
57 SNS_CM_EnableTempHigh Enable High ENUM Unsigned16 C-253 S 1 R/W 0x0000 = Disable
Extrap Temperature (2) (Any) 0x0001 = Enable
Extrapolation Alarm
58 CM_TEMPERATURE_ Temperature Unit ENUM Unsigned16 R-004 S C° R 0000 = None
UNITS (2) 1 1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
59 CM_DENSITY_UNITS Density Unit ENUM Unsigned16 R-004 S g/cm3 R 0000 = None
(2) 0 1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
60 CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special ENUM Unsigned16 R-004 S l/s R 0000 = None
volume flow rate unit (2) 2 1347 = m3/s
1348 = m 3/min
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 = ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day

Table B-15 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views

OD
Operation
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 XD_ERROR 1 1
CM Process Variables
8 CM_Ref_Dens 5 5
9 CM_Spec_Grav 5 5
Troubleshooting
10 CM_Std_Vol_Flow 5 5
11 CM_Net_Mass_Flow 5 5
12 CM_Net_Vol_Flow 5 5
13 CM_Conc 5 5
14 CM_Baume 5 5
CM Totals
15 CM_Std_Vol_Total 5 5
16 CM_Std_Vol_Inv 5 5
17 CM_Net_Mass_Total 5 5
18 CM_Net_Mass_Inv 5 5
19 CM_Net_Vol_Total 5 5
20 CM_Net_Vol_Inv 5 5
21 CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total 2
22 CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Total 2
PlantWeb Alerts
23 CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total 2
CM Setup Data
24 EN_CM 2
25 CM_CURVE_LOCK 2
26 CM_Mode 2
27 CM_Active_Curve 2
28 CM_Curve_Index 2
29 CM_Temp_Index 2
30 CM_Conc_Index 2
31 CM_Temp_ISO 4
32 CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO 4
33 CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff 4
34 CM_Conc_Label_55 4
35 CM_Dens_At_Conc 4
TB Reference
36 CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff 4
37 CM_Conc_Label_51 4
38 CM_Ref_Temp 4
39 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp 4
40 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens 4
41 CM_Slope_Trim 4

Table B-15 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)

OD
42 CM_Slope_Offset 4
43 CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit 4
44 CM_Curve_Name 12
45 CM_Max_Fit_Order 2
46 CM_Fit_Results 2
47 CM_Conc_Unit_Code 2
48 CM_Expected_Acc 4
49 CM_FEATURE_KEY 2
v4.0 Additions
50 SNS_ResetCMVolInv 2
51 SNS_ResetCMNetMassInv 2
52 SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv 2
53 SNS_CM_ResetFlag 2
54 SNS_CM_EnableDensLowExtrap 2
55 SNS_CM_EnableDensHighExtrap 2
56 SNS_CM_EnableTempLowExtrap 2
57 SNS_CM_EnableTempHighExtrap 2
v6.0 Additions
58 CM_TEMPERATURE_UNITS 2
59 CM_DENSITY_UNITS 2
60 CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS 2
Totals 74 24 76 99

Appendix C
RB Reference
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
C.1 Resource block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table C-1) and views (Table C-2) for the resource block.
Table C-1 Resource block parameters
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Diagrams
Release
Access
0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE Beginning of the resource VARIABLE DS_64 5 S N/A R/W N/A 1.0
block
1 ST_REV The revision level of the VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R N/A 1.0
static data associated with
the function block.
2 TAG_DESC The user description of the STRING OCTET 32 S Spac R/W Any 32 Characters 1.0
intended application of the STRING es
block.
3 STRATEGY The strategy field can be VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 0 R/W N/A 1.0
375 Communicator
the block.
4 ALERT_KEY The identification number VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 to 255 1.0
alarms, etc.
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, RECORD DS-69 4 mix Auto R/W See section 2.6 of FF-891 1.0
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
6 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects STRING BIT STRING 2 D/20 - R bit 0 = Other 1.0
the error status associated bit 1 = Block Config Error
with the hardware or bit 3 = Simulate Active
software components bit 6 = Maintenance Soon
associated with a block. bit 7 = Input Failure
bit 8 = Output Failure
bit 9 = Memory Failure
bit 11 = Lost NV Data
bit 13 = Maintenance Now
bit 15 = Out of Service
7 RS_STATE Contains the operational VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 D/20 - R 0 = Invalid State 1.0
state of the Function Block 1 = Start/Restart
Application. 2 = Initialization
3 = On-Line Linking
4 = On-Line
5 = Standby
6 = Failure
ProLink
8 TEST_RW Read/write test parameter RECORD DS-85 112 D/20 0 R 1.0

- used only for
conformance testing.
9 DD_RESOURCE String identifying the tag of STRING OCTET 32 S Spac R Any 32 Characters 1.0
the resource which STRING es
contains the Device
Description for this
resource.

Table C-1 Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
10 MANUFAC_ID Manufacturer identification ENUM Unsigned32 4 S 0x00 R 0x000310 = Micro Motion 1.0
number - used by an 0310
interface device to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
11 DEV_TYPE Manufacturer’s model ENUM Unsigned16 2 S 0x20 R 0x2000 = 2700 1.0
number associated with 00
the resource - used by
interface devices to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
12 DEV_REV(1) Manufacturer revision VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 4 R 1.0
number associated with
the resource - used by an
the DD file for the
resource.
13 DD_REV(1) Revision of the DD VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 1 R 1.0
associated with the
resource - used by an
the DD file for the
resource.
14 GRANT_DENY Options for controlling RECORD DS-70 2 S 0.0 R/W 1.0
access of host computer
and local control panels to
operating, tuning and
alarm parameters of the
block.
15 HARD_TYPES The types of hardware ENUM Bit String 2 S 0x80 R 0x80 = SCALAR_INPUT 1.0
available as channel
numbers.
16 RESTART Allows a manual restart to ENUM Unsigned8 1 D 1 R/W 1 = Run 1.0
be initiated. Several 2 = Restart resource
degrees of restart are 3 = Restart with defaults
possible. 4 = Restart processor
17 FEATURES Used to show supported ENUM Bit String 2 S 0x10 R 0x0010 = SoftWriteLock 1.0
resource block options. | 0x0020 = FailSafe
0x20 0x0040 = Report
| 0x0080 = Unicode
0x40
|
0x80
18 FEATURE_SEL Used to select resource ENUM Bit String 2 S 0x10 R/W 0x0010 = SoftWriteLock 1.0
block options. 0x0020 = FailSafe
0x0040 = Report
0x0080 = Unicode
19 CYCLE_TYPE Identifies the block ENUM Bit String 2 S 0x80 R 0x0080 = CycleScheduled 1.0
execution methods | 0x0040 = BlockComplete
available for this resource. 0x40
20 CYCLE_SEL Used to select the block ENUM Bit String 2 S 0 RW 0x0080 = CycleScheduled 1.0
execution method for this 0x0040 = BlockComplete
resource.
21 MIN_CYCLE_T Time duration of the VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 8000 R 1.0
shortest cycle interval of
which the resource is
capable. Measured in 1/32
millisecond.
22 MEMORY_SIZE Available configuration VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 8 R 1.0
memory in the empty
resource in Kbytes. To be
checked before attempting
a download.

Store/Rate (HZ)
RB Reference
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
23 NV_CYCLE_T Minimum time interval in VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 31,68 R 1.0

1/32 millisec specified by 0,000
the manufacturer for
writing copies of NV
parameters to non-volatile
memory. Zero means
it will never be
automatically copied. At
the end of
NV_CYCLE_TIME, only
those parameters which
have changed (as defined
by the manufacturer) need
to be updated in NVRAM
24 FREE_SPACE Percent of memory VARIABLE Float 4 D - R 0-100 Percent 1.0
available for further
configuration. Zero in a
preconfigured resource.
Diagrams
25 FREE_TIME Percent of the block VARIABLE Float 4 D - R 0-100 Percent 1.0
processing time that is
free to process additional
blocks.
26 SHED_RCAS Time duration in 1/32 VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 6400 R/W 1.0
millisec at which to give up 00
on computer writes to
function block RCas
locations. Shed from
RCas shall never happen
when SHED_RCAS = 0.
27 SHED_ROUT Time duration in 1/32 VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 6400 R/W 1.0
millisec at which to give up 00
on computer writes to
function block ROut
locations. Shed from Rout
shall never happen when
SHED_ROUT = 0.
28 FAULT_STATE Condition set by loss of ENUM Unsigned8 1 N 1 R 1 = Clear 1.0
communication to an 2 = Active
output block, fault
375 Communicator
promoted to an output
block or a physical
contact. When Fault State
condition is set, Then
output function blocks will
perform their FSTATE
actions.
29 SET_FSTATE Allows the Fault State ENUM Unsigned8 1 D 1 R/W 1 = Off 1.0
condition to be manually 2 = Set
initiated by selecting Set.
30 CLR_FSTATE Writing a Clear to this ENUM Unsigned8 1 D 1 R/W 1 = Off 1.0
parameter will clear the 2 = Set
device fault state if the
field condition, if any, has
cleared.
31 MAX_NOTIFY Maximum number of VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 5 R 1.0
unconfirmed notify
messages possible.
32 LIM_NOTIFY Maximum number of VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 5 R/W 0 to MAX_NOTIFY 1.0
unconfirmed alert notify
messages allowed.
33 CONFIRM_TIME The time in 1/32 millisec VARIABLE Unsigned32 4 S 6400 R/W 1.0
the resource will wait for 00
confirmation of receipt of a
report before trying again.
ProLink
Retry shall not happen

when
CONFIRM_TIME = 0.
34 WRITE_LOCK If locked, no writes from ENUM Unsigned8 1 S 1 R/W 1 = Unlocked 1.0
anywhere are allowed, 2 = Locked
except to clear
WRITE_LOCK. Block
inputs will continue to be
updated.

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
35 UPDATE_EVT This alert is generated by RECORD DS-73 1/4 D - R 1.0

any change to the static
data.
36 BLOCK_ALM The block alarm is used RECORD DS-72 13 D - R/W 1.0
for all configuration,
hardware, connection
failure or system problems
in the block. The cause of
the alert is entered in the
subcode field. The first
alert to become active will
set the Active status in the
Status attribute. As soon
as the Unreported status
is cleared by the alert
reporting task, another
block alert may be
reported without clearing
the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
37 ALARM_SUM The current alert status, RECORD DS-74 8 mix - R/W 1.0
unacknowledged states,
unreported states, and
disabled states of the
alarms associated with the
function block.
38 ACK_OPTION Selection of whether ENUM Bit String 2 S 0 R/W 0 = Auto Ack Disabled 1.0
alarms associated with the 1 = Auto Ack Enabled
block will be automatically
acknowledged.
39 WRITE_PRI Priority of the alarm VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 to 15 1.0
generated by clearing the
write lock.
40 WRITE_ALM This alert is generated if RECORD DS-72 1/3 D - R/W 1.0
the write lock parameter is
cleared.
41 ITK_VER Major revision number of VARIABLE Unsigned16 2 S 5 R 3.0
the interoperability test
case used in certifying this
device as interoperable.
The format and range of
the version number is
defined and controlled by
the Fieldbus Foundation.
Note: The value of this
parameter will be zero (o)
if the device has not been
registered as
interoperable by the FF.
EPM Parameters
48 DISTRIBUTOR Private label distributor ENUM unsigned32 4 S 0x00 R 0x000310 = Micro Motion 1.0
0310
49 DEV_STRING This would be used to load VARIABLE array of 32 S 0 R/W 1.0
new licensing into the unsigned32
device. Micro Motion 2700
does not use this.
50 XD_OPTIONS Indicates which transducer ENUM bit string 4 S - R 0x80000000 = Base 1.0
block licensing options are 0x40000000 = Cal
enabled. 0x20000000 = Diag
0x10000000 = Dev Info
0x08000000 = LDO
0x04000000 = API
0x02000000 = CM
51 FB_OPTIONS Indicates which function ENUM bit string 4 S - R 0x20000000 = Basic 1.0
block licensing options are 0x10000000 = Regulatory
enabled.
52 DIAG_OPTIONS Indicates which ENUM bit string 4 S Std R 0x80000000 = Standard 1.0
diagnostics licensing
options are enabled.
53 MISC_OPTIONS Indicates which ENUM bit string 4 S 0 R 1.0
miscellaneous licensing
options are enabled

Store/Rate (HZ)
RB Reference
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
54 RB_SFTWR_REV_ Major revision of device VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 4 R 1.0

MAJOR(1) software.
55 RB_SFTWR_REV_ Minor revision of device VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 00 R 1.0
MINOR(1) software.
56 RB_SFTWR_REV_ Build number of device VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 0 R 1.0
BUILD(1) software.
57 RB_SFTWR_REV_ALL(1) String containing the STRING visible string 48 S R 4.00 @ July 6, 2007 1.0
software revision and build
information.
58 HARDWARE_REV Hardware revision. VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 1 R 1.0
59 OUTPUT_BOARD_SN Output board serial VARIABLE unsigned32 4 S 0 R 1.0
number.
60 FINAL_ASSY_NUM User defined. Intended to VARIABLE unsigned32 4 S 0 R/W 1.0
be the final assembly
number placed on the
Diagrams
neck label.
61 DETAILED_STATUS Additional status. ENUM bit string 4 D - R 0x00000001 = RAM Err 1.0
0x00000002 = ROM Err
0x00000008 = NV Err
0x00000020 = Mfg Blk Err
0x00000040 = TB Err
0x00002000 = Lost
Deferred NV Data
0x00004000 = NV Writes
Deferred
62 SUMMARY_STATUS An enumerated value of ENUM unsigned8 1 D - R 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
repair analysis 1 = No repair needed
2 = Repairable
3 = Call service center
63 MESSAGE_DATE Date associated with the RECORD time of day 6 S 0 R/W 1.0
MESSAGE_TEXT
parameter
64 MESSAGE_TEXT Used to indicate changes STRING octet string 96 S spac R/W 1.0
made by the user to the es
device’s installation,
375 Communicator
configuration, or
calibration.
65 SELF_TEST Allows a manual self test ENUM unsigned8 1 D 1 R/W 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
to be initiated. 1 = No test
2 = Self-test
66 DEFINE_WRITE_LOCK Enumerated value ENUM unsigned8 1 S 1 R/W 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
describing the 1 = Everything locked
implementation of the 2 = Only the resource and
WRITE_LOCK. transducer locked
(physical device)
67 SAVE_CONFIG_NOW Allows a user to write any ENUM unsigned8 1 D 1 R/W 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
pending values to 1 = No Save
non-volatile memory. 2 = Burn EEPROM with
latest values
68 SAVE_CONFIG_BLOCKS Number of EEPROM VARIABLE unsigned8 1 D 0 R 1.0
blocks that have been
modified since last burn.
This value will count down
to zero when the
configuration is saved.
START_WITH_DEFAULT Indicates action taken ENUM unsigned8 1 D 0 R/W 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
S when a device is power 1 = do not power-up with
cycled. NV defaults
2 = power-up with default
node address
ProLink

pd_tag and node address
data for the entire
communications stack (no
application data)
SIMULATE_IO Status of Simulate switch ENUM unsigned8 1 D 0 R 1 = switch in “off” position 1.0
2 = switch in “on” position

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
SECURITY_IO Micro Motion 2700 does ENUM unsigned8 1 D 0 R 1 = switch in “off” position 1.0
not use this. 2 = switch in “on” position
Status of Security switch
SIMULATE_STATE The state of the simulate ENUM unsigned8 1 D 0 R 1 = switch off, simulation 1.0
jumper not allowed
2 = switch on, simulation
not allowed (need to cycle
switch)
3 = switch on, simulation
allowed
DOWNLOAD_MODE Micro Motion 2700 does ENUM unsigned8 1 D 1 0 = Uninitialized 1.0
not use this. 1 = Run Mode
Gives access to the boot 2 = Download Mode
block code for over the
wire downloads.
RECOMMENDED_ACTI Enumerated list of VARIABLE unsigned16 2 D - R 0 = Uninitialized 3.0
ON recommended actions 1 = No action required
displayed with a device 2 = Electronics Fail
alert. 3 = Xmtr Initializing
4 = CP/Xmtr Err
5 = Xmtr not Charize
6 = Sensor Failed
7 = Mass Flow OOR
8 = Density OOR
9 = Temp OOR
10 = Tube Not Full
11 = CM Bad Curve fit
12 = Low Power
13 = Meter Verification err
14 = Cal Failed
15 = Slug Flow
16 = Drive OOR
17 = Possible Data Loss
18 = API PV OOR
19 = CM Extrapolation Err
20 = Sensor Simulate
21 = PWA Simulate
22 = NV Write Deferred
23 = Cal in progress
FAILED_PRI Designates the alarming VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 - 15 3.0
priority of the
FAILED_ALM.
FAILED_ENABLE Enabled FAILED_ALM ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R bit 0 = No error 3.0
alarm conditions. bit 2 = Electronics Fail
Corresponds bit for bit to bit 3 = Xmtr Initializing
the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit bit 4 = CP/Xmtr Err
on means that the bit 5 = Xmtr not Charize
corresponding alarm bit 6 = Sensor Failed
condition is enabled and bit 7 = Mass Flow OOR
will be detected. A bit off bit 8 = Density OOR
means the corresponding bit 9 = Temp OOR
alarm condition is disabled bit 10 = Tube not Full
and will not be detected. bit 11 = CM Bad Curve fit
bit 12 = Low Power
bit 13 = Meter Verif. Error
bit 14 = Cal Failed
bit 16 = Slug Flow
bit 17 = Drive OOR
bit 18 = Data loss possible
bit 19 = API PV OOR
bit 20 = CM Extrapolation
bit 26 = Sensor Simulate
bit 27 = PWA Simulate
bit 28 = NV Write Deferred
bit 29 = Cal in progress
FAILED_MASK Mask of Failure Alarm. ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
Corresponds bit for bit to
the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit
on means that the failure
is masked out from
alarming.
FAILED_ACTIVE Enumerated list of failed ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W if See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
conditions within a device. PWA
Bits that are set indicate simulat
that condition exists. e on,
else R

Store/Rate (HZ)
RB Reference
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
FAILED_ALM Alarm indicating a failure RECORD DS-72 13 D - 3.0

within a device which
makes the device
non-operational.
MAINT_PRI Designates the alarming VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 - 15 3.0
priority of the
MAINT_ALM.
MAINT_ENABLE Enabled MAINT_ALM ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
alarm conditions.
the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit
on means that the
corresponding alarm
condition is enabled and
will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding
alarm condition is disabled
and will not be detected.
Diagrams
MAINT _MASK Mask of Maintenance ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
Alarm. Corresponds bit for
bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE.
A bit on means that the
failure is masked out from
alarming.
MAINT _ACTIVE Enumerated list of ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W if See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
Maintenance conditions PWA
within a device. Bits that simulat
are set indicate that e on,
condition exists. else R
MAINT _ALM Alarm indicating the RECORD DS-72 13 D - 3.0
device needs
maintenance soon. If the
condition is ignored, the
device will eventually fail.
ADVISE_PRI Designates the alarming VARIABLE unsigned8 1 S 0 R/W 0 - 15 3.0
priority of the
ADVISE_ALM.
375 Communicator
ADVISE_ENABLE Enabled ADVISE_ALM ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
alarm conditions.
the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the
corresponding alarm
condition is enabled and
will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding
alarm condition is disabled
and will not be detected.
ADVISE _MASK Mask of Advisory Alarm. ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the
failure is masked out from
alarming.
ADVISE _ACTIVE Enumerated list of ENUM bit string 4 D 0 R/W if See FAILED_ENABLE 3.0
advisory conditions within PWA
a device. Bits that are set simulat
indicate that condition e on,
exists. else R
ProLink

Store/Rate (HZ)
Initial Value
OD Index
Release
Access
ADVISE _ALM Alarm indicating advisory DS-72 13 D - 3.0

alarms. These conditions
do not have a direct
impact on the process or
device integrity.
HEALTH_INDEX Parameter representing VARIABLE Unsigned8 1 D - R 1 - 100 3.0
the overall health of the
device, 100 being perfect
and 1 being
non-functioning.
PWA_SIMULATE Parameter that allows ENUM Unsigned8 1 D 0 R/W if 0 = Simulation off 3.0
direct writes to PWA active Simula 1 = Simulation on
parameters and the te
detailed status bytes that Switch
activate the Plant Web is On,
alerts. The simulate else
switch/jumper must be value
“ON” before is Off.
PWA_SIMULATE can be
turned on.
(1) The initial value is based on transmitter software version 4.0. If the transmitter contains a later version of software, the initial value
may be different.
C.2 Resource block views

Table C-2 lists the views for the resource block. The Fieldbus Foundation defines the views as:
• View 1 – View object defined to access the dynamic operating parameters of a block
• View 2 – View object defined to access the static operating parameters of a block.
• View 3 – View object defined to access all the dynamic parameters of a block.
• View 4 – View object defined to access static parameters not included in View 2.
The number in the cell represents the size of the parameter in bytes. Each view can only contain a
total of 122 bytes of data. Each view must start with ST_REV.
Table C-2 Resource block views

OD
Index Parameter Mnemonic View 1 View 2 View 3 View 3_1 View 4 View 4_1 View 4_2
0 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 TAG_DESC
2 STRATEGY 2
3 ALERT_KEY 1
4 MODE_BLK 4 4
5 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
6 RS_STATE 1 1
7 TEST_RW
8 DD_RESOURCE
9 MANUFAC_ID 4
10 DEV_TYPE 2
11 DEV_REV 1
12 DD_REV 1
13 GRANT_DENY 2
14 HARD_TYPES 2

Table C-2 Resource block views continued

OD
RB Reference
15 RESTART
16 FEATURES 2
17 FEATURE_SEL 2
18 CYCLE_TYPE 2
19 CYCLE_SEL 2
20 MIN_CYCLE_T 4
21 MEMORY_SIZE 2
22 NV_CYCLE_T 4
23 FREE_SPACE 4
24 FREE_TIME 4 4
25 SHED_RCAS 4
26 SHED_ROUT 4
27 FAULT_STATE 1 1
Diagrams
28 SET_FSTATE
29 CLR_FSTATE
30 MAX_NOTIFY 1
31 LIM_NOTIFY 1
32 CONFIRM_TIME 4
33 WRITE_LOCK 1
34 UPDATE_EVT
35 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
36 BLOCK_ALM
37 ALARM_SUM 8 8
38 ACK_OPTION 2
39 WRITE_PRI 1
40 WRITE_ALM
375 Communicator
41 ITK_VER 2
42 DISTRIBUTOR 4
43 DEV_STRING 32
44 XD_OPTIONS 4
45 FB_OPTIONS 4
46 DIAG_OPTIONS 4
47 MISC_OPTIONS 4
48 RB_SFTWR_REV_MAJOR
49 RB_SFTWR_REV_MINOR
50 RB_SFTWR_REV_BUILD
51 RB_SFTWR_REV_ALL 48
52 HARDWARE_REV 1
53 OUTPUT_BOARD_SN 4
54 FINAL_ASSY_NUM 4
55 DETAILED_STATUS 4
ProLink
56 SUMMARY_STATUS 1
57 MESSAGE_DATE 6
58 MESSAGE_TEXT 96
59 SELF_TEST 1
60 DEFINE_WRITE_LOCK 1
61 SAVE_CONFIG_NOW 1

Table C-2 Resource block views continued

OD
62 SAVE_CONFIG_BLOCKS 1 1
63 START_WITH_DEFAULTS 1 1
64 SIMULATE_IO 1
65 SECURITY_IO 1
66 SIMULATE_STATE 1
67 DOWNLOAD_MODE
68 RECOMMENDED_ACTION 2
69 FAILED_PRI 1
70 FAILED_ENABLE 4
71 FAILED_MASK 4
72 FAILED_ACTIVE 4
73 FAILED_ALM 13
74 MAINT_PRI 1
75 MAINT_ENABLE 4
76 MAINT _MASK 4
77 MAINT _ACTIVE 4
78 MAINT _ALM 13
79 ADVISE_PRI 1
80 ADVISE_ENABLE 4
81 ADVISE _MASK 4
82 ADVISE _ACTIVE 4
83 ADVISE _ALM 13
84 HEALTH_INDEX 1
85 PWA_SIMULATE 1
Totals 25 31 22 67 31 117 126

Appendix D
RB Reference
Flowmeter Installation Types and Components
D.1 Overview
This appendix provides illustrations of different flowmeter installations and components for the
Model 2700 transmitter.
D.2 Installation diagrams

Model 2700 transmitters can be installed in four different ways:
Diagrams
• Integral
• 4-wire remote
• 9-wire remote
• Remote core processor with remote transmitter
See Figure D-1.
D.3 Component diagrams

Figure D-2 shows the transmitter and core processor components in integral installations.
Figure D-3 shows the transmitter components in 4-wire remote installations and remote core
processor with remote transmitter installations.
375 Communicator
Figure D-4 shows the transmitter/core processor assembly in 9-wire remote installations.
In remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, the core processor is installed
stand-alone. See Figure D-5.
D.4 Wiring and terminal diagrams

In 4-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, a 4-wire cable is
used to connect the core processor to the transmitter’s mating connector. See Figure D-6.
In 9-wire remote installations, a 9-wire cable is used to connect the junction box on the sensor to the
terminals on the transmitter/core processor assembly. See Figure D-8.
Figure D-9 shows the transmitter’s power supply terminals.
Figure D-9 shows the output terminals for the Model 2700 transmitter.
ProLink

Figure D-1 Installation types

Transmitter
Integral
Core processor
(standard only)
Sensor
4-wire remote Transmitter

Sensor
4-wire cable
Core processor
(standard or enhanced)
Transmitter
9-wire remote
Sensor
Core processor
(standard only)
9-wire cable
Junction box
Remote core processor with Transmitter

remote transmitter
4-wire cable
Sensor
Core processor
(standard only)
9-wire cable
Junction box

Figure D-2 Transmitter and core processor components – Integral installations
RB Reference
Transmitter
Transition ring
Core processor
4 X Cap screws (4 mm)
Base
Sensor
Diagrams
Figure D-3 Transmitter components, junction end-cap removed – 4-wire remote and remote core processor
with remote transmitter installations –
Ground lug
Main enclosure
Conduit opening
for 4-wire cable
Mounting bracket
375 Communicator
Junction housing
4 X Cap screws
(4 mm)
Junction end-cap
Mating connector
socket
Mating connector
ProLink

Figure D-4 Transmitter/core processor assembly exploded view – 9-wire remote installations
Transmitter
Core processor
Core processor housing
Conduit opening
for 9-wire cable
End-cap
Mounting bracket
Figure D-5 Remote core processor components
Core processor lid

Conduit opening
for 4-wire cable
Conduit opening Core processor housing

for 9-wire cable
Mounting bracket
End-cap

Figure D-6 4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and standard core processor
RB Reference
Core processor User-supplied or Mating connector
terminals factory-supplied 4-wire cable (transmitter)
VDC+ (Red)
RS-485/B (Green)
RS-485/A (White)
VDC– (Black)
Diagrams
Figure D-7 4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and enhanced core processor
Core processor User-supplied or Mating connector

terminals factory-supplied 4-wire cable (transmitter)
RS-485/A (White)
RS-485/B (Green)
VDC– (Black) 375 Communicator
VDC+ (Red)
ProLink

Figure D-8 9-wire cable between sensor junction box and core processor
9-wire cable 9-wire terminal connections

(core processor)
Black Ground screw

to sensor junction box (Drains from all Black
wire sets)
Brown Red
Green Violet Green
White Yellow White
Brown
Red
Blue Plug and

Gray socket
Orange Blue
Violet Gray
Yellow
Orange
Mounting
screw
Figure D-9 Output and power supply terminals
Fieldbus terminals 1
2
9 (–, N)
10 (+, L)
Equipment
ground
7
8
Service port

Appendix E
RB Reference
Connecting with the Field Communicator
E.1 Overview
The Field Communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool for FOUNDATION
fieldbus-compatible devices, including the Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter. This appendix
provides basic information for connecting the Field Communicator to your transmitter.
The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with the Communicator and can
perform the following tasks:
Diagrams
• Turn on the Communicator
• Navigate the Communicator menus
• Transmit and receive configuration information between the Communicator and FOUNDATION
fieldbus-compatible devices
• Use the alpha keys to type information
If you are unable to perform the tasks listed above, consult the Communicator manual before
attempting to use the Communicator. The documentation is available on the Micro Motion web site
(www.micromotion.com).
Note: In this manual, procedures identified as performed with a fieldbus host can be accomplished
with a Field Communicator.
375 Communicator
E.2 Viewing the device descriptions
To access all of the features of the Model 2700 transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus, the Field
Communicator must have the device description (DD) for version 6.x devices. DD files are available
in the Products section of the Micro Motion web site (www.micromotion.com).
To view the Model 2700 device descriptions that are installed on your Field Communicator:
1. In the Foundation fieldbus application menu, choose Utility, then Available Device
Descriptions List.
2. Expand the Micro Motion, Inc. branch, then expand the 2000 branch.
3. If you do not have a Dev Rev 6 device description installed, you will need to obtain it in order
to use the functionality described in this manual. Contact Micro Motion.
E.3 Connecting to a transmitter

The Field Communicator can be connected directly to a fieldbus segment. Figures E-1 and E-2
ProLink
illustrate two examples for connecting the Communicator to a segment.

Connecting with the Field Communicator
Figure E-1 Bench connection example
Transmitter Connection Fieldbus power

block conditioner
+ + + +
– +– – – –
Terminator Terminator 24 VDC power

supply
Communicator
Figure E-2 Field connection example
Transmitters
Fieldbus power Fieldbus junction

conditioner box
–
Terminator Terminator
Fieldbus host
control system
24 VDC power
supply Communicator

Appendix F
RB Reference
Connecting with ProLink II or Pocket ProLink
Software
F.1 Overview
ProLink II is a Windows-based configuration and management tool for Micro Motion transmitters. It
provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
This chapter provides basic information for connecting ProLink II to your transmitter. The following
Diagrams
topics and procedures are discussed:
• Requirements (see Section F.2)
• Configuration upload/download (see Section F.3)
• Connecting to a Model 2700 transmitter (see Section F.4)
The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with ProLink II software. For
more information on using ProLink II, see the ProLink II manual.
F.2 Requirements
To use ProLink II with a Model 2700 transmitter, the following are required:
• ProLink II v2.0 or later for most basic functions
375 Communicator
• ProLink II v2.91 or later for access to many advanced functions, such as Smart Meter
Verification
• An RS-485 to RS-232 signal converter, to convert the PC port’s signal to the signal used by the
transmitter. For computers without serial ports, certain USB to RS-232 converters can be used
in conjunction with the RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Both types of converter are available
from Micro Motion.
• 25-pin to 9-pin adapter (if required by your PC)
Note: If you are using the enhanced core processor and you connect directly to the core processor’s
RS-485 terminals (see Appendix D) instead of to the transmitter, ProLink II v2.4 or later is required.
This connection type is sometimes used for troubleshooting.
F.3 ProLink II configuration upload/download

ProLink II provides a configuration upload/download function which allows you to save configuration
sets to your PC. This allows:
ProLink
• Easy backup and restore of transmitter configuration

• Easy replication of configuration sets
Micro Motion recommends that all transmitter configurations be downloaded to a PC as soon as the
configuration is complete.

Connecting with ProLink II or Pocket ProLink Software
To access the configuration upload/download function:

1. Connect ProLink II to your transmitter as described in this chapter.
2. From the File menu:
• To save a configuration file to a PC, use the Load from Xmtr to File option.
• To restore or load a configuration file to a transmitter, use the Send to Xmtr from File
option.
F.4 Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter

You can temporarily connect a personal computer (PC) to the transmitter’s service port. The service
port is located within the transmitter wiring compartment, beneath the intrinsic safety cover. See
Figure F-1.
Figure F-1 Service port
Intrinsic safety cover
Service port (7,8)
F.4.1 Connecting to the service port

To temporarily connect to the service port, which is located in the non-intrinsically safe power-supply
compartment:
1. Attach the signal converter to the serial or USB port of your PC, using a 25-pin to 9-pin
adapter if required.
2. Open the cover to the intrinsically safe wiring compartment.
WARNING
Opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area can cause an
explosion.
Because the wiring compartment must be open to make this connection, the
service port should be used only for temporary connections, for example, for
configuration or troubleshooting purposes.
When the transmitter is in an explosive atmosphere, do not use the service port
to connect to the transmitter.

3. Open the power supply compartment.
RB Reference
WARNING
Opening the power supply compartment can expose the operator to
electric shock.
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch the power supply wires or
terminals while using the service port.
4. Connect the signal converter leads to the service port terminals. See Figure F-2.
Figure F-2 Connecting to the service port
Diagrams
RS-485B 25 to 9 pin serial port
adapter (if necessary)
RS-485A
RS-485 to RS-232
Service port signal converter
375 Communicator
5. Start ProLink II. Choose Connection > Connect to Device. In the screen that appears,
specify:
• Protocol: Service Port
• COM Port: as appropriate for your PC
All other parameters are set to service port required values and cannot be changed.
6. Click Connect.
7. If an error message appears:
a. Swap the leads between the two service port terminals and try again.
b. Ensure that you are using the correct COM port.
c. Check all the wiring between the PC and the transmitter.
ProLink

F.5 ProLink II language

ProLink II can be configured for the following languages:
• English
• French
• German
To configure the ProLink II language, choose Tools > Options. In this manual, English is used as the
ProLink II language.

Appendix G
Using the Display
Display
G.1 Overview
This appendix describes the basic use of the display and provides a menu tree for the display. You can
use the menu tree to locate and perform display commands quickly.
Note that Model 2700 transmitters can be ordered with or without displays. Not all configuration and
use functions are available through the display. If you need the added functionality, or if your
transmitter does not have a display, you must use either a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
NE53 History
G.2 Components
Figure G-1 illustrates the display components.
Figure G-1 Display components

Current value
Process variable line

Units of
measure
Indicator light
Index
Scroll optical switch
Select optical switch
G.3 Using the optical switches

The Scroll and Select optical switches are used to navigate the display menus. To activate an optical
switch, touch the lens in front of the optical switch or move your finger over the optical switch close
to the lens. There are two optical switch indicators: one for each switch. When an optical switch is
activated, the associated optical switch indicator is a solid red.

Using the Display
CAUTION
Attempting to activate an optical switch by inserting an object into the
opening can damage the equipment.
To avoid damage to the optical switches, do not insert an object into the openings.
Use your fingers to activate the optical switches.
G.4 Using the display

The display can be used to view process variable data or to access the transmitter menus for
configuration or maintenance.
G.4.1 Display language

The display can be configured for the following languages:
• English
• French
• Spanish
• German
Due to software and hardware restrictions, some English words and terms may appear in the
non-English display menus. For a list of the codes and abbreviations used on the display, see
Table G-1.
For information on configuring the display language, see Section 4.18.6.
In this manual, English is used as the display language.
G.4.2 Viewing process variables

In ordinary use, the Process variable line on the LCD panel shows the configured display variables,
and the Units of measure line shows the measurement unit for that process variable.
• See Section 4.18.5 for information on configuring the display variables.
• See Table G-1 for information on the codes and abbreviations used for display variables.
If more than one line is required to describe the display variable, the Units of measure line alternates
between the measurement unit and the additional description. For example, if the LCD panel is
displaying a mass inventory value, the Units of measure line alternates between the measurement
unit (for example, G) and the name of the inventory (for example, MASSI).
Auto Scroll may or may not be enabled:
• If Auto Scroll is enabled, each configured display variable will be shown for the number of
seconds specified for Scroll Rate.
• Whether Auto Scroll is enabled or not, the operator can manually scroll through the configured
display variables by activating Scroll.
For more information on using the display to manage totalizers and inventories, see Chapter 5.

Using the Display
G.4.3 Using display menus

Note: The display menu system provides access to basic transmitter functions and data. It does not
provide access to all functions and data. To access all functions and data, use a fieldbus host or
Display
ProLink II
To enter the display menu system:
1. Activate Scroll and Select simultaneously.
2. Hold Scroll and Select until the words SEE ALARM or OFF-LINE MAINT appear.
Note: Access to the display menu system may be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the OFF-LINE
MAINT option does not appear. For more information, see Section 4.18.1.
If no optical switch activity occurs for two minutes, the transmitter will exit the off-line menu system
and return to the process variable display.
To move through a list of options, activate Scroll.
To select from a list or to enter a lower-level menu, scroll to the desired option, then activate Select. If
a confirmation screen is displayed:
NE53 History
• To confirm the change, activate Select.
• To cancel the change, activate Scroll.
To exit a menu without making any changes:
• Use the EXIT option if available.
• Otherwise, activate Scroll at the confirmation screen.
G.4.4 Display password

A password can be used to control access to either the off-line maintenance menu, the alarm menu, or
both. The same code is used for both:
• If both passwords are enabled, the user must enter the password to access the top-level off-line
menu. The user can then access either the alarm menu or the off-line maintenance menu
without re-entering the password.
Index
• If only one password is enabled, the user can access the top-level off-line menu, but will be
prompted for the password when he or she attempts to access the alarm menu or the off-line
maintenance menu (depending on which password is enabled). The user can access the other
menu without a password.
• If neither password is enabled, the user can access all parts of the off-line menu without a
password.
For information about enabling and setting the display password, refer to Section 4.18.
Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password
is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the
petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these
functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.
If a password is required, the word CODE? appears at the top of the password screen. Enter the digits
of the password one at a time by using Scroll to choose a number and Select to move to the next
digit.
If you encounter the display password screen but do not know the password, wait 30 seconds without
activating any of the display optical switches. The password screen will timeout automatically and
you will be returned to the previous screen.

Using the Display
G.4.5 Entering floating-point values with the display

Certain configuration values, such as meter factors or output ranges, are entered as floating-point
values. When you first enter the configuration screen, the value is displayed in decimal notation (as
shown in Figure G-2) and the active digit is flashing.
Figure G-2 Numeric values in decimal notation
SX.XXXX
Sign Digits
For positive numbers, leave this space Enter a number (maximum length: eight
blank. For negative numbers, enter a digits, or seven digits and a minus sign).
minus sign (–). Maximum precision is four.
To change the value:

1. Select to move one digit to the left. From the leftmost digit, a space is provided for a sign. The
sign space wraps back to the rightmost digit.
2. Scroll to change the value of the active digit: 1 becomes 2, 2 becomes 3, ..., 9 becomes 0, 0
becomes 1. For the rightmost digit, an E option is included to switch to exponential notation.
To change the sign of a value:
1. Select to move to the space that is immediately left of the leftmost digit.
2. Use Scroll to specify – (for a negative value) or [blank] (for a positive value).
In decimal notation, you can change the position of the decimal point up to a maximum precision of
four (four digits to the right of the decimal point). To do this:
1. Select until the decimal point is flashing.
2. Scroll. This removes the decimal point and moves the cursor one digit to the left.
3. Select to move one digit to the left. As you move from one digit to the next, a decimal point
will flash between each digit pair.
4. When the decimal point is in the desired position, Scroll. This inserts the decimal point and
moves the cursor one digit to the left.
To change from decimal to exponential notation (see Figure G-3):
1. Select until the rightmost digit is flashing.
2. Scroll to E, then Select. The display changes to provide two spaces for entering the exponent.
3. To enter the exponent:
a. Select until the desired digit is flashing.
b. Scroll to the desired value. You can enter a minus sign (first position only), values
between 0 and 3 (for the first position in the exponent), or values between 0 and 9 (for the
second position in the exponent).
c. Select.
Note: When switching between decimal and exponential notation, any unsaved edits are lost. The
system reverts to the previously saved value.
Note: While in exponential notation, the positions of the decimal point and exponent are fixed.

Using the Display
Figure G-3 Numeric values in exponential notation
SX.XXXEYY
Display
Sign Digit (0–9)
Digits
Enter a four-digit
number; three digits Sign or Digit (0–3)
must fall to the right E
of the decimal point. Exponent
indicator
To change from exponential to decimal notation:

1. Select until the E is flashing.
NE53 History
2. Scroll to d.
3. Select. The display changes to remove the exponent.
To exit the menu:
• If the value has been changed, Select and Scroll simultaneously until the confirmation screen
is displayed.
- Select to apply the change and exit.
- Scroll to exit without applying the change.
• If the value has not been changed, Select and Scroll simultaneously until the previous screen
is displayed.
Index

Using the Display
G.5 Abbreviations
The display uses a number of abbreviations. Table G-1 lists the abbreviations used by the display.
Table G-1 Display codes and abbreviations

Abbreviation Definition Abbreviation Definition
ACK ALARM Acknowledge alarm LPO_A Left pickoff amplitude
ACK ALL Acknowledge all alarms LVOLI Volume inventory
ADDR Address LZERO Live zero flow
AUTO SCRLL Auto scroll MAINT Maintenance
AVE_D Average density MASS Mass flow
AVE_T Average temperature MASSI Mass inventory
BRD_T Board temperature MFLOW Mass flow
BKLT Backlight MSMT Measurement
CAL Calibrate MTR F Meter factor
CHANGE CODE Change display password MTR_T Case temperature (T-Series only)
CODE Display password NET M CM net mass flow rate
CONC Concentration NET V CM net volume flow rate
CONFG Configure (or configuration) NETMI CM net mass inventory
CORE Core processor NETVI CM net volume inventory
CUR Z Current zero OFFLN Offline
DENS Density PASSW Password
DGAIN Drive gain PRESS Pressure
DISBL Disable PWRIN Input voltage
DRIVE% Drive gain r. Revision
DSPLY Display RDENS Density at reference temperature
ENABL Enable RPO_A Right pickoff amplitude
ENABLE ACK Enable the ACK ALL function SGU Specific gravity units
ENABLE ALARM Enable the alarm menu SIM Simulated
ENABLE AUTO Enable auto scroll SPECL Special
ENABLE OFFLN Enable the offline menu STD M Standard mass flow rate
ENABLE PASSW Enable the display password STD V Standard volume flow rate
ENABLE RESET Enable resetting of totals STDVI Standard volume inventory
ENABLE START Enable stopping/starting of totals TCDENS Temperature-corrected density
EXT_P External pressure TCORI Temperature-corrected inventory
EXT_T External temperature TCORR Temperature-corrected total
EXTRN External TCVOL Temperature-corrected volume
FAC Z Factory zero TEMPR Temperature
FCF Flow calibration factor TUBEF Raw tube frequency
FLDIR Flow direction VER Version
GSV Gas standard volume VERFY Verify
GSV F Gas standard volume flow VFLOW Volume flow
GSV I Gas standard volume inventory VOL Volume flow
GSV T Gas standard volume total WRPRO Write protect
INTERN Internal WTAVE Weighted average
LANG Language XMTR Transmitter
LOCK Write protect

Appendix H
NE53 History
Display
H.1 Overview
This appendix documents the change history of the Model 2700 transmitter with FOUNDATION
fieldbus software.
H.2 Software change history
NE53 History
Table H-1 describes the change history of the transmitter software. Operating instructions are English
versions. Instructions in other languages have different part numbers but matching revision letters.
Table H-1 Transmitter software change history
Software Operating
Date version Changes to software instructions
09/2000 1.0 Initial product release 20000326 Rev. A
06/2001 2.0 Software expansion 20000326 Rev. B
Added support to configure the process variable units for mass flow,
volume flow, density and temperature from the display.
Software adjustment
Clarified the interaction of the digital fault setting and the last
measured value timeout.
Feature addition
Index
Added backup link active scheduler (LAS).
Added PID function block.
Added analog output function block for pressure compensation.
Added support for pressure compensation to the transducer block.
Added drive gain as a selectable channel for AI blocks.
Added ability to enable fieldbus simulate mode through the service
port.
2/2002 2.2 Software adjustment 20000326 Rev. C
Improved the handling of RS-485 communication via the service port.
Improved the user experience with the display.
Feature additions
Added protections against low-power conditions.

NE53 History
Table H-1 Transmitter software change history continued
Software Operating
7/2004 3.x Software expansion 20000326 Rev. D
Software version information available via the display or Modbus.
Totalizers can be disabled in addition to start/stop.
Doubled the number of virtual communication relationships (VCRs).
Software adjustment
Improved the handling of AI block status when slug flow is detected.
Some fieldbus parameters made persistent across power resets.
Introduced finer-grained control over operator access to display
functions.
Feature addition
Petroleum measurement application added.
Added gas standard volume functionality.
Enhanced density application added.
Added support for enabling fieldbus simulation mode via the display.
Added support for 32-character tagnames configurable via Modbus.
Added support for Analog Input Block configurable via Modbus.
06/2007 4.0 Software expansion 20000326 Rev. E
Added temperature and density units to API transducer block.
Additional configuration ability for the display.
Feature addition
Added configurable alarm severity.
Added more support for gas standard volume functionality.
Added meter verification as an option.
Added multiple display language selections.
Implemented PlantWeb Alerts II.
Added the ability to enable simulate mode through the Device
Information Transducer Block.
Added default values for AI blocks:
• AI1: mass flow in g/s
• AI2: temperature in °C
• AI3: density in g/cm3
• AI4: volume flow in l/s
01/2008 5.0 Software adjustment 20000326 Rev. EA
Improved handling of Gas Standard Volume cutoffs.
Improved local display functionality for API and concentration
measurement variables.
Feature addition
Added support for Meter Verification AMS Snap-On.
Added extra security for local display off-line menu access.
Resolved non-volatile memory (NVM) reliability issue present in
version 4.0 and 5.0 software.

NE53 History
Table H-1 Transmitter software change history continued
Software Operating
Display
Smart Meter Verification
Improved representation of gas volume on local display
Harmonized behavior of gas volume density parameter with other gas
standard volume parameters
NE53 History
Index

Index
Display
A Cutoffs 82
Acknowledging alarms 87, 109, 110 troubleshooting 122
AI block
channels 6 D
configuration error 118 Damping 79
Alarm log 110, 111 troubleshooting 122
Alarm menu 87 Decimal notation 208
password 88, 93, 207 Default values 145–177, ??–181, 183–??
Alarm severity 77 Density
Alarms cutoff 82
See Process alarms or Status alarms measurement units
NE53 History
Auto scroll 87, 206 configuring 55
list 59
B Density calibration procedure 22, 42
Backlight (display) 88 Device description 2, 199
Button Device settings 85
See Optical switch Display 2
acknowledging alarms 109
C alarm menu 87
Calibration 21, 22 backlight 88
density calibration procedure 22, 42 codes 210
temperature calibration procedure 22, 48 components 205
troubleshooting 118, 122, 124 decimal notation 208
zero decimals 95
See Zero calibration exponential notation 209
Channels 6 language 96, 206
Characterizing 21, 23 off-line menu 87
Index
density calibration factors 25 overview 205
flow calibration values 25 password 87, 88, 93, 207
parameters 23 precision 95
sample calibration tags 24, 25 scroll rate 90
troubleshooting 122, 123 Smart Meter Verification tools 36
CODE? 207 update period 91
Codes using display menus 207
display codes 210 variables 95
status alarm codes 123 viewing alarms 109
Communicator viewing process variables 206
See Field Communicator Documentation 2
Configuration files (ProLink II) 201 Drive gain
Configuration worksheet 2 troubleshooting 129
Core processor 194
LED 132 E
sensor pins 137 Enabling/disabling display functions 87
terminals 197, 198 Enhanced density application 69
troubleshooting 131 Exponential notation 209
Customer service 3

Index
External pressure compensation LED

See Pressure compensation core processor 132
External temperature compensation status 108
See Temperature compensation Linearization 72
troubleshooting 122
F Liner material 86
Factory zero 18
Fault alarms 77 M
Field Communicator 1, 2, 199 Mass flow
bench connection example 200 cutoff 82
field connection example 200 measurement units
Fieldbus host 2 configuring 55
Flange 86 list 57
Flow calibration pressure 9 Measurement units 55
Flow direction parameter 84 Meter factors 40
Function block channels 6 configuration 40
Meter validation 21, 22, 40
G Meter verification
Gas standard volume 52 See Smart Meter Verification 22
configuring gas density 53 Micro Motion customer service 3
cutoff 82
Gas Wizard 53, 54 O
measurement units Off-line menu 87
configuring 55 password 87, 93, 207
list 59 Optical switch 205
Gas Wizard 53, 54 Scroll 113, 205
Select 113, 205
H Out-of-service mode 2
Hysteresis 75 Output scale 73
troubleshooting 122
I Output terminals 198
Ignore alarms 77
Informational alarms 77 P
Installation types 194 Password 87, 88, 93, 207
INT function block Petroleum measurement application 64
mode 7 Pickoff voltage
resetting 7 troubleshooting 129, 130
Inventories PlantWeb Alerts 139
definition 111 AI/AO block status 144
measurement units 55 definition 139
parameter names 111 setting 139
resetting 113 timeout 98
starting and stopping 113 using 141
viewing values 111 Power-supply terminals 198
ISA configuration worksheet 2 Precision (of the display) 95
Pressure
L measurement units
Language configuring 55
used by ProLink II 204 list 60
used on display 206

Index
Pressure compensation 9 Smart Meter Verification 21, 22

definition 9 display tools 36
enabling 9 procedure 27
Display
pressure correction factors 9 ProLink II tools 34
pressure source 10 results 33
values 9 scheduling 38
Prior zero 18 Software history 211
Priorities Software tag 85
alarm priorities 75 Status alarms
Process alarms 74 acknowledging 87, 109, 110
assigning values 74 codes 123
hysteresis 75 responding to 107
priorities 75 severity 77
responding to 107 troubleshooting 123
viewing 107 viewing 107
Process variables Status LED 108
channels 6
NE53 History
troubleshooting 119 T
viewing values 103 Tag 85
ProLink II 2, 201 Temperature
alarm log 110, 111 measurement units
configuration files 201 configuring 55
connecting to a transmitter 202 list 60
language 204 Temperature calibration procedure 22, 48
requirements 201 Temperature compensation 12
Smart Meter Verification tools 34 enabling 12
version 2, 201 temperature source 13
Terminals 198
R Timeout (PlantWeb Alerts) 98
Restoring factory configuration 128 Totalizers
Restoring zero 18 definition 111
Revision history 211 measurement units 55
Index
parameter names 111
S resetting 113
Safety 1 starting and stopping 113
Scroll (optical switch) 113, 205 viewing values 111
Scroll rate 90 Transducer blocks
Select (optical switch) 113, 205 channels 6
Sensor material 86 reference 145
Sensor parameters 86
Serial number 86 U
Service port 202 Units 55
Severity Update period (display) 91
of alarms 77
Simulation mode 105 V
fieldbus 105 Variables
sensor 106 viewing values 103
Slug flow 81 Volume flow
definition 81 cutoff 82
duration 81 measurement units
limits 81 configuring 55
troubleshooting 127 list 58

Index
W
Wiring problems 126
Write-protect mode 99
Z
Zero calibration 14
procedure 15
restoring zero 18
troubleshooting 118, 124

© 2010, Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved. P/N 20000326, Rev. EA
*20000326*
For the latest Micro Motion product specifications, view the
PRODUCTS section of our web site at www.micromotion.com
Micro Motion Inc. USA

Worldwide Headquarters
7070 Winchester Circle
Boulder, Colorado 80301
T +1 303-527-5200
+1 800-522-6277
F +1 303-530-8459
Micro Motion Europe Micro Motion Asia

Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management
Neonstraat 1 1 Pandan Crescent
6718 WX Ede Singapore 128461
The Netherlands Republic of Singapore
T +31 (0) 318 495 555 T +65 6777-8211
F +31 (0) 318 495 556 F +65 6770-8003
Micro Motion United Kingdom Micro Motion Japan

Emerson Process Management Limited Emerson Process Management
Horsfield Way 1-2-5, Higashi Shinagawa
Bredbury Industrial Estate Shinagawa-ku
Stockport SK6 2SU U.K. Tokyo 140-0002 Japan
T +44 0870 240 1978 T +81 3 5769-6803
F +44 0800 966 181 F +81 3 5769-6844

Micromotion 2700 Transmitter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micromotion 2700 Transmitter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micromotion 2700 Transmitter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration and Use Manual

P/N 20000326, Rev. EA

Micro Motion® Model 2700

Configuration and Use Manual

Chapter 1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Configuration and Use Manual iii

3.6 Performing a density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

iv Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

5.4.1 Viewing alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Appendix A PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Configuration and Use Manual v

Appendix B Model 2700 Transducer Blocks Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Appendix C Model 2700 Resource Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Appendix D Flowmeter Installation Types and Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Appendix E Connecting with the Field Communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Appendix F Connecting with ProLink II or Pocket ProLink Software . . . . . . . . . 201

Appendix G Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

vi Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Appendix H NE53 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Configuration and Use Manual vii

Before You Begin

1.3 Determining equipment versions

Table 1-1 Obtaining version information

Component With ProLink II With a fieldbus host With the display

Configuration and Use Manual 1

1.4 Flowmeter documentation

Table 1-2 Flowmeter documentation resources

1.5 Communication tools

1.6 Out-of-service mode

1.7 Planning the configuration

2 Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

1.8 Micro Motion customer service

Before You Begin

Configuration and Use Manual 3

1 Meter Tag No.

Before You Begin

2.2 Applying power

Configuration and Use Manual 5

2.3 Assigning function block channels

Table 2-1 Default channel configuration

Block Default channel Units

Figure 2-1 Assigning function block channels – Fieldbus host

Output Scale: Units Index

6 Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Table 2-2 Available transducer block channels

Before You Begin

Configuration and Use Manual 7

Figure 2-2 Configuring INT function block mode – Fieldbus host

Table 2-3 INT function block modes

Reports the value of this parameter:

8 Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Figure 2-3 Configuring manual or automatic resetting – Fieldbus host

Before You Begin

Integration Type – Set to manual or automatic resetting.

2.5 Configuring pressure compensation

2.5.1 Pressure compensation values

2.5.2 Enabling pressure compensation